, 


TvIRRARV 

OK  THK 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 

CrlKT  OF" 


Deceived 
Accessions  No . 


University  of  California  •  Berkeley 


^^y^^S^k^K 


•;ssSJ£<^'$r4v''ASS»i£««3w4 

•^MiL^^v^Mfe^ 


"  ^^^^\^<^r^^^ 


Q9  THB 


f     nr.i      *•  

&zm'$&f 


THE 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS 


Of 


THE   RED   MAN 


BY 


JOSEPH     NICOLAR 

II 

OLD  TOWN,  MAINE 


BANGOR,  MAINE 

C,  H.  GLASS  &  Co.,  PRINTERS 

1893 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1893,  by 

JOSEPH    NICOLAR, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


'REPACK. 


N  offering  this  work  which  will  give  the 
public  the  full  account  of  all  the  pure 
traditions  which  have  been  handed  down 
from  the  beginning  of  the  red  man's  world  to  the 
present  time,  I  deem  it  proper  to  state  that  there  have 
been  no  historical  works  of  the  white  man,  nor  any 
other  written  history  from  any  source  quoted. 

All  prophesies,  theories  and  ideas  of  the  educated 
and  intelligent  of  all  races  have  been  laid  aside  ;  no 
supposition  nor  presumption  of  any  class  entertained, 
because  it  is  intended  to  show  only  the  simple  and 
natural  state  of  the  life,  habits  and  ways  as  they  existed 
among  the  pure,  innocent  and  simple  people  whose 
traditions  are  here  written. 

Simple  as  one  would  imagine  them  to  be,  yet  some 
prophesies  of  theirs  when  given  a  full  account  of,  will 
be  very  interesting,  especially  when  it  is  shown  that 
none  of  the  studies  nor  the  researches  of  the  white 
man  have  ever  penetrated — thereby  dwelt  upon  them. 
But  still  remains  with  him  as  hidden  things. 

Nevertheless,  a  close  observer  cannot  fail  to  see  that 
some  of  their  prophesies  are  very  significant  and 
important,  not  only  to  the  red  man  himself,  but  nations 
of  all  other  races  as  well. 

(iii) 


iv  PREFACE. 

And  this  is  not  all  !  Because  when  his  ways  and 
habits  are  learned  it  will  be  found  that  they  are  so 
peculiar  it  has  spread  the  veil  over  the  eyes  and  minds 
of  the  learned  of  these  modern  dates,  and  have  caused 
many  to  enquire,  "  Where  did  the  red  man  come  from?" 

This  is  the  question  we  intend  to  answer !  We 
intend  also,  to  remove  the  fear,  that  the  life  of  the  red 
man  will  pass  away  unwritten,  and  this  is  written 
because  there  is  an  abundance  of  evidence  showing 
that  there  is  a  general  desire  among  the  people  that 
some  one  ought  to  write  it  now  if  ever. 

In  this  undertaking  I  wish  to  say  to  the  public,  that 
I  am  one  of  the  descendants  of  the  remnants  of  that 
once  numerous  and  most  powerful  race  ;  and  my  life 
having  been  spent  in  the  researches  of  my  people's 
past  life,  beginning  in  my  early  boyhood  days  to  the 
present  time  I  can  say  that,  by  the  grace  of  nature  I 
have  been  crowned  with  a  success. 

Only  one  thing  is  lacking ;  and  that  is  the  proper 
education  to  do  such  work,  and  one  who  reads  this  will 
be  fully  convinced  when  he  sees  that  I  was  never  edu 
cated  to  that  degree  as  to  be  able  to  excite  the  feelings 
of  the  people  and  make  them  pronounce  me  as  a 
brilliant  and  popular  writer.  However,  I  have  under 
taken  the  work  arid  have  done  it  in  my  own  way  ; 
have  given  the  full  account  of  all  the  traditions  as  I 
have  gathered  them  from  my  people. 

After  forty  years  of  search  and  study  I  am  satisfied 
that  no  more  can  be  found,  as  the  old  traditional  story 
tellers  have  all  gone  to  th^  happy  hunting  ground. 

Klose-kur-beh,    "The    (Man    From    Nothing,"    was 


PREFACE.  V 

claimed  by  all  the  children  of  the  red  man,  to  be  the 
first  person  who  came  upon  the  earth.  And  he  was 
their  teacher !  He  taught  them  how  they  must  live, 
and  told  them  about  the  spiritual  power,  how  it  was  in 
every  living  thing,  and  it  was  the  same  power  that  has 
sent  him  to  prepare  the  way  on  earth  for  the  genera 
tions  to  come  ;  and  to  subdue  all  obstacles  which  are 
against  the  nature  of  mankind  ;  and  to  reduce  the  earth 
to  such  a  state  as  to  become  a  happy  land  for  the  peo 
ple. 

The  works  of  Klose-kur-beh  were  wonderful — tra 
ditions  extend  to  the  time  of  his  presence  among  them, 
and  his  works  and  teaching,  during  his  stay  with  his 
children,  as  he  called  all  the  people,  will  be  fully 
written  in  this  work.  His  coming  into  the  world  the 
instructions  and  power  given  him  by  the  Great  Spirit 
will  be  fully  shown  and  explained.  Also  how  great 
the  love  and  reverence  bestowed  upon  him  by  the 
people  for  his  good  works. 

In  reading  the  works,  it  can  clearly  be  seen  that  this 
Klose-kur-beh  was  at  the  creation. 

His  claims  to  that  effect  were  not  only  by  his  words, 
but  also  by  his  most  wonderful  works  as  will  be  shown 
in  the  following  pages  of  this  book. 

JOSEPH   NICOLAR. 

OLD  TOWN,  MAINE,  1893. 


x>  — 


CHAPTER  I. 

The  Creation.  —  Klose-kur-beh's  Journey.— Meeting  his  Companions.  —  The 
Marriage. 

J^  LOSE-KUR-BEH,  "The  Man  from  Nothing,"  first 
called  the  minds  of  the  "Red  Children"  to  his 
coming  into  the  world  when  the  world  contained  no 
other  man,  in  flesh,  bat  himself.  When  he  opened  his 
eyes  lying  on  his  back  in  the  dust,  his  head  toward  the 
rising  of  the  sun  and  his  feet  toward  the  setting  of  the 
sun,  the  right  hand  pointing  to  the  north  and  his  left 
hand  to  the  south.  Having  no  strength  to  move  any 
part  of  his  body,  yet  the  brightness  of  the  day  revealed 
to  him  all  the  glories  of  the  whole  world  ;  the  sun  was 
at  its  highest,  standing  still,  and  beside  it  was  the  moon 
without  motion  and  the  stars  were  in  their  fixed  places, 
while  the  firmament  was  in  its  beautiful  blue.  While 
yet  his  eyes  were  held  fast  in  their  sockets,  he  saw  all 
that  the  world  contained.  Besides  what  the  region  of 
the  air  revealed  to  him,  he  saw  the  land,  the  sea,  moun 
tains,  lakes,  rivers,  and  the  motion  of  the  waters,  and 
in  it  he  saw  the  fishes.  On  the  land  were  the  animals 
and  beasts,  and  in  the  air  the  birds.  In  the  direction 
of  the  rising  sun  he  saw  the  night  approaching. 

While  the   body  clung  to  the  dust  he  was   without 
mind,  and  the  flesh  without  feeling.     At  that  moment 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED   MAN. 

the  heavens  were  lit  up,  with  all  kinds  of  bright  colors 
most  beautiful,  each  color  stood  by  itself,  and  in 
another  moment  every  color  shot  a  streak  into  the 
other,  and  soon  all  the  colors  intermingled,  forming  a 
beautiful  brightness  in  the  center  of  the  heavens  over 
the  front  of  his  face.  Nearer  and  nearer  came  the 
brightness  toward  his  body  until  it  got  almost  to  a 
touching  distance,  and  a  feeling  came  into  his  flesh,  he 
felt  the  warmth  of  the  approaching  brightness,  and  he 
fell  into  a  deep  sleep.  The  wind  of  the  heavens  fanned 
his  brow,  and  the  sense  of  seeing  returned  unto  him, 
but  he  saw  not  the  brightness  he  beheld  before,  but 
instead  of  the  brightness,  a  person  like  unto  himself, 
standing  at  his  right  hand,  and  the  person's  face  was 
toward  the  rising  of  the  sun.  In  silence  he  raised  his 
right  hand,  in  the  direction  of  the  rising  sun,  passed  it 
from  thence  to  the  setting  of  the  sun,  and  immediately 
a  streak  of  lightning  followed  the  motion  of  his  hand 
from  one  side  of  the  earth  to  the  other.  Again  he 
raised  his  right  hand  to  the  south,  passing  it  to  the 
north,  and  immediately  another  streak  of  lightning 
followed  the  motion  of  his  hand.  Immediately  after 
the  passing  of  the  lightning  over  his  body,  a  sense  of 
thought  came  unto  him.  The  first  thought  that  came 
unto  him  was,  that  he  believed  the  person  was  able  to 
bring  strength  unto  him,  and  the  "Great  Being" 
answered  his  thought  saying  these  words:  "Thou 
doest  well  believing  in  me,  I  am  the  head  of  all  that 
thou  beholdest,  and  as  thou  believest,  arise  from  thy 
bed  of  dust,  and  stand  on  thy  feet,  let  the  dust  be 
under  thy  feet,  and  as  thou  believest,  thou  shalt  have 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN.  9 

strength  to  walk."  Immediately  strength  came  unto 
him,  and  he  arose  to  his  feet,  and  stood  beside  the 
4 'Great  Being". 

After  this  the  "Great  Being"  moved  and  turned  half 
around  towards  his  right  hand,  facing  the  sun.  Lifting 
both  hands  and  looking  up  he  said  :  "Go  thy  way  !"  and 
immediately  the  whole  heavens  obeyed.  The  sun, 
moon  and  all  the  stars  moved  towards  the  setting 
of  the  sun.  The  night  coming  slowly  toward  their 
standing,  when  the  Great  Being  sending  up  his  voice, 
saying:  "Let  us  make  man  in  our  own  image,"  and 
immediately  dropped  his  two  hands  and  cast  his  eyes 
upon  the  land  and  moved  half  way  around  again  toward 
his  right  hand,  facing  the  setting  of  the  sun,  and 
passed  his  right  hand  from  the  north  to  the  south.  The 
lightning  followed  the  motion  of  his  hand,  from  the 
north  to  the  south,  and  again  passing  his  hand  from 
the  setting  of  the  sun  to  the  rising  of  the  sun,  imme 
diately  the  lightning  followed  the  motion  of  his  right 
hand,  from  the  setting  of  the  sun  to  the  rising  of  the 
sun,  and  when  the  lightning  came  upon  the  night 
which  was  approaching  it  disappeared ;  the  darkness 
of  the  night  hid  from  them,  what  was  beyond  the  night. 

Immediately  the  dust  of  the  land  began  to  shake 
and  to  heave,  in  the  form  of  a  cross,  where  the  motion 
had  been  made.  And  there  was  an  image  of  a  man 
lay  on  the  ground. — his  head  toward  the  north,  and 
his  feet  toward  the  south — his  right  hand  pointing  to 
the  setting  of  the  sun,  and  his  left  hand  toward  the 
rising  of  the  sun,  his  face  lay  towards  the  blue  skies 
over  their  heads,  and  his  face  was  white  with  the  pale- 


10  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED  MAN. 

ness,  because  life  was  not  yet  in  him ;  Klose-Kur-beh 
said,  "and  immediately  the  Great  Being  said  unto  me, 
'Turn  thy  face  to  the  setting  of  the  sun,'  and  I  obeyed 
him  ;  and  again  the  Great  Being  spoke  unto  me,  say 
ing  4I  will  not  suffer  thee  to  see  this  man  arise  to 
his  feet  like  yourself  therefore,  go  thy  way,  toward 
thy  right  hand  and  seek  thy  companions  !  I  will  be  thy 
teacher  and  you  will  be  their  teacher ;'  and  I  obeyed 
his  command." 

Turning  toward  my  right  hand  and  facing  the  north. 
Behold !  there  was  a  high  mountain  seven  rainbows 
high.  To  this  I  went,  and  up  the  mountain  I  walked  ; 
seven  times  my  strength  left  me,  and  seven  times  the 
wind  of  the  heavens  fanned  my  brow,  each  time  giving 
me  strength  to  go  on  my  way.  Seven  times  I  reached 
out  my  hand  unto  the  seven  rainbows  and  lifted  myself 
on  my  feet,  so  that  I  was  able  to  walk  to  the  top  of  the 
mountain,  and  immediately  a  cloud  of  the  heavens 
lowered,  and  lifted  me  from  the  top  of  the  mountain, 
carrying  me  toward  the  rising  of  the  sun,  toward 
where  the  night  was  coming,  and  unto  the  night  the 
clouds  carried  me,  and  unto  the  darkness  I  was  carried 
and  in  the  midst  of  the  darkness  a  voice  spoke  unto 
me,  saying,  "even  in  the  darkness  I  will  be  with  thee." 
These  words  brought  light  into  the  clouds  so  that  the 
clouds  which  carried  me  was  like  a  ball  of  fire,  and 
the  ball  of  fire  gave  us  light  while  passing  the  dark 
ness  of  the  night,  and  when  the  darkness  of  the  night 
passed  toward  the  setting  of  the  sun,  the  light  of  the 
day  came  from  the  rising  of  the  sun. — And  the  clouds 
turned  white  and  the  brightness  of  fire  was  not  there. 
And  the  wind  from  the  setting  of  the  sun  came  upon 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OP  THE   RED  MAN.  11 

the  clouds,  and  shook  the  clouds  so  it  began  to  break 
in  pieces  until  all  was  scattered,  leaving  only  a  small 
mist  which  held  me,  which  soon  left  me  standing  on 
my  feet  on  the  top  of  a  high  mountain,  my  face  was 
toward  the  rising  of  the  sun,  and  at  this  moment  a 
voice  spoke  unto  me,  saying,  "Turn  again  thy  face  to 
thy  right  hand,  and  thy  face  be  toward  the  noon  sun — 
this  is  South, — and  thy  back  is  toward  the  cold  hand — 
this  is  North, — thy  right  hand  now  point  to  the  setting 
of  the  sun, — this  is  West, — and  thy  left  hand  point  to 
the  rising  of  the  sun, — this  is  East.  From  the  East  and 
from  the  West,  from  the  North  and  from  the  South,  I 
will  send  the  wind,  to  let  you  know  that  even  the  wind 
will  obey  me,  and  now  I  will  command  the  sun  to 
arise.  Go  thy  way  toward  the  sun,  and  when  the  sun 
sets  and  night  comes,  there  rest.  On  the  morrow  arise 
with  the  sun,  and  go  towards  it  until  it  sets.  Seventy 
times  seven,  shalt  thou  arise,  with  the  sun,  and  walk 
towards  it  until  it  sets.  Seventy  times  seven  nights 
will  I  visit  thee,  and  teach  thee  thy  duties.  At  the 
end  of  thy  journey  there  abide,  and  thy  companion 
will  come  unto  thee."  Immediately  the  sun  arose  and 
I  started  on  my  journey. 

Thus  by  the  command  of  the  "Great  Being,"  Klose- 
kur-beh  started  on  his  journey  to  find  his  companions. 

The  writer  will  now  narrate  in  the  following  pages, 
a  full  account  of  all  the  original  traditions,  in  a  simple 
way  and  manner,  so  that  even  the  small  children  will 
readily  understand  them. 

The  name  of  Klose-kur-beh  was  given  to  this 
wonderful  being,  after  the  people  came  and  learned 


12  LIFE   AND    TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN. 

his  teachings,  and  learned  how  he  came  into  existence. 

This  name,  or  the  word,  Klose-kur-beh  needs  much 
explanation,  since  it  has  been  the  case  in  all  languages 
that  some  of  the  old  words  have  been  changed,  very 
often  corrupting  the  word  into  something  else,  or 
changing  its  meaning.  For  instance,  the  word  Klose- 
ki,  in  the  old  Indian  language  meant  simple  or  nothing. 

"Klose-ki-ner-quatt,"  is  the  word  for  simple  appear 
ance  ;  and  "Klose-kur-beh"  means,  the  man  from  noth 
ing. 

But  since  there  has  been  such  a  vast  change  in  the 
Indian  dialect,  in  later  years,  the  word  "Klose-kur- 
beh"  is  now  understood,  to  mean  a  man  of  falsehood, 
or  more  vulgarly,  a  liar. 

Should  some  of  the  Indian  children  read  this  work, 
they  must  bear  in  mind,  that  this  word,  "Klose-kur- 
beh"  was  not  intended  to  be  used  as  the  word  liar,  as 
it  will  readily  be  seen  that  the  original  Indian  phrase 
ology  remedies  this  corruption.  Hence  the  word 
Klose-hur-beh  must  be  allowed  to  rest  on  the  original 
meaning. 

After  giving  the  account  of  the  journey  of  Klose- 
kur-beh,  in  his  own  words,  the  writer  will  now  use  the 
words  of  the  traditional  story  tellers. 

So  important  was  the  duty  which  devolved  upon 
them,  that  they  were  not  only  careful  in  all  their 
tellings,  but  were  watchful  as  well.  They  resorted  to 
all  sorts  of  penetrating  efforts  to  learn  and  gather  all 
that  could  be  found  for*the  benefit  of  their  people,  and 
after  all  that  was  done  there  still  lies  a  veil  over  the 
period  during  the  seventy  times  seven  days,  in  which, 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  13 

Klose-kur-beh  travelled,  because  there  was  no  mention 
made  by  him,  whether  he  was  fed  and  clothed  during 
this  journey  or  not.  Therefore  this  part  remains  a 
mystery  to  this  day.  If  Klose-kur-beh  made  mention 
of  it,  the  story  tellers  did  not.  At  a  later  period,  the 
opinion  of  all  the  people  agree  that  Klose-kur-beh  did 
not  reveal  that  part  to  them,  and  the  people  came  to 
the  conclusion  that  there  was  nothing  said  about  it  by 
Klose-kur-beh.  It  was  clear  to  the  minds  of  the 
people  that  Klose-kur-beh  made  particular  mention  of 
the  seventy  times  seven  nights  of  rest  and  of  the  visit 
of  the  "Great  Being."  In  each  of  the  visits  seven 
words  passed  between  them  until  the  last  seven  days. 
In  these  last  seven  days  Klose-kur-beh  was  fed  and 
clothed,  and  shown  how  to  obtain  food,  and  with  what 
to  clothe  himself.  In  all  these  days  no  seasons  were 
mentioned  until  the  last  seven  days  came. 

None  of  the  traditions,  located  the  country  wherein 
all  these  things  took  place,  but  it  was  agreed  by  all 
interested  in  later  years,  that  it  was  on  the  eastern 
part  of  the  Red  man's  World  :  So  much  of  this  belief 
remained  as  a  settled  fact,  that  the  people  began  to 
look  for  the  appearance  of  other  people  in  that  direc 
tion,  which  proved  to  them  afterwards  that  their  belief 
was  a  true  one.  Another  evidence  which  strongly 
points  to  indicate  the  true  location,  is  that  the  last 
seven  days  Klose-kur-beh  comes  to  an  open  sea  every 
morning  while  going  in  the  direction  of  the  rising  of 
the  sun. 

The  teaching  of  the  Great  Being  to  Klose-kur-beh 
was  very  lengthy.  In  the  first  seven  nights  the  Great 


14  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED   MAN. 

Being  made  known  to  Klose-kur-beh  that  the  world 
was  all  spiritual,  that  there  was  a  living  spirit  in  all 
things,  and  the  spirit  of  all  things  has  power  over  all, 
and  as  the  spirit  of  all  things  center  in  Him,  he  was  the 
Great  Spirit,  by  His  will,  all  things  move,  all  power 
comes  from  Him  ;  and  he — "Klose-kur-beh"  must  teach 
the  people  that  there  is  but  one  Great  Spirit. 

When  Klose-kur-beh  was  teaching  his  people,  he 
points  out  to  them  where  the  Great  Spirit  was  : — in 
the  sun — moon — stars — clouds  of  heaven — mountains, 
and  even  in  the  trees  of  the  earth.  After  the  teach 
ing  of  Klose-kur-beh  had  been' sown  and  had  taken  root, 
then  all  the  Red  men  could  be  seen  to  make  signs  of 
reverance  and  worship,  when  any  of  these  things  met 
their  gaze. 

The  religious  teaching  of  Klose-kur-beh  did  not 
bear  much  fruit  until  after  he  had  shown  the  people, 
the  power  given  him  by  the  Great  Spirit.  Klose-kur- 
beh  must  have  seen  the  unfruitfulness  of  his  teaching, 
because  he  began  to  say  to  them,  that  he  would  very 
soon  begin  to  show  them  by  his  works,  that  every 
word  he  said  to  them  was  true.  After  he  had  accom 
plished  all  he  was  charged  to  do  by  the  Great  Spirit, 
then  the  people  declared  his  teaching  to  be  all  true. 

Three  things  of  Klose-kur-beh's  teaching  are  held 
more  sacred  than  all  others. 

The  first  was  the  power  of  the  Great  Spirit. 

Second,  the  land  the  Great  Spirit  gave  them  they 
must  never  leave,  and  the  third,  they  must  never 
forget  their  first  mother,  but  must  always  show  the 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  15 

love  they  have  for  her,  and  all  work  must  cease  during 
the  observances  of  her  honor. 

Before  going  further  with  the  work,  it  is  necessary 
to  give  an  account  of  Klose-kur-beh  meeting  his  com 
panions,  and  after  giving  fully  of  all  the  particulars  of 
that  eventful  period,  I  shall  enter  again  .into  the  ac 
count  of  his  teaching. 

After  the  seventy  times  seven  nights  had  passed, 
when  the  sun  was  highest,  a  person  came  unto  Klose- 
kur-beh  from  the  rising  of  the  sun  ;  the  one  who  came 
was  a  woman  and  she  was  bowed  down  with  old  age. 
She  began  to  speak  unto  Klose-kur-beh,  saying :  "Noo- 
sus — my  grandson,"  to  which  Klose-kur-beh  answered: 
"Ka-goos  Nok-a-mi, — what  is  it  my  grandmother?"  and 
Nok-a-mi  said  :  4<I  have  come  to  stay  and  I  will  be 
useful  in  preparing  food  for  you.  I  have  no  other 
place  to  go ;  I  know  of  no  other  person  but  you  ;  I  am 
bowed  down  with  old  age ;  yet  I  came  into  existance 
this  very  noon-day  sun,  and  owe  my  existance  to  the 
dew  of  the  rock,  and  as  the  noon-day  sun  shineth  hot, 
the  heat  warmeth  the  dew,  bringing  life,  and  I  am  she. 
When  I  opened  my  eyes  my  face  was  toward  the 
setting  of  the  sun,  and  a  loud  voice  told  me  to  go  forth 
in  the  direction  of  my  face  and  find  my  companions 
and  there  abide,  and  forthwith  I  have  come."  Then 
Klose-kur-beh  with  a  loud  voice  of  joy  lifted  his  hands 
towards  the  noon-day  sun,  thanking  the  Great  Spirit 
in  fulfilling  the  promise.  And  immediately  Klose- 
kur-beh  walked  to  the  brookside  and  there  beheld  a 
little  animal  swimming  in  the  water.  He  called  the 
little  animal  to  him  and  the  animal  obeyed  him,  and 


16  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED   MAN. 

Klose-kur-beh  slew  the  animal  with  sticks  and  brought 
it  forth  to  his  house  of  sticks  and  leaves  and  prepared 
the  meat  for  a  meal  for  himself  and  the  woman,  and  a 
voice  in  the  air  came  to  their  ears,  saying:  "It  is  not 
good  to  eat  meat  and  blood  together,  therefore  I  will 
send  fire  unto  you  ;  take  it  and  put  it  on  the  ground 
and  put  sticks  on  it  so  the  sticks  will  burn,  and  put  the 
meat  on  the  fire  so  the  blood  will  cook  dry,  and  when 
it  is  cooked  take  and  eat,  this  is  good."  After  this 
saying,  a  cloud  arose  in  the  direction  of  the  setting  of 
the  sun,  which  came  fast  with  a  loud  noise,  and  with 
fire  brightening  the  clouds.  The  clouds  burst,  and 
send  forth  a  streak  of  fire,  striking  the  top  of  the 
soft-wood  tree  that  was  standing  by  the  brook-side,  and 
the  fire  breaking  the  top  of  the  tree,  rolled  around, 
following  the  grains  of  the  tree,  tearing  the  bark  ;  and 
on  the  nakedness  of  the  tree,  a  smoke  arose,  and  there 
was  a  fire  burning  near  the  roots. 

\/  Klose-kur-beh  immediately  gathered  all  of  the  fire, 
put  it  on  the  ground  with  some  sticks,  which  he  made 
burn.  He  put  the  meat  on  the  fire  and  cooked  it. 
After  it  was  cooled  the  two  persons  did  eat,  and  Klose- 
kur-beh  said  it  was  good.  On  the  morrow  at  the  noon 
day  sun,  a  young  man  came  unto  Klose-kur-beh  and 
No-ka-mi,  and  the  young  man's  motions  were  very 
quick  for  he  was  yet  young  in  age.  Facing  the  cold 
land,  he  stood  before  them  and  said  unto  Klose-kur-beh  : 
"I  have  come  to  abide  with  you  and  I  have  no  other 
place  to  go,  because  I  know  no  other  persons  but  you. 
I  have  come  to  help  you  in  all  things.  I  am  young  in 
age,  quick  in  my  motion.  I  will  be  useful  to  you.  I 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN.  17 

am  small,  but  the  body  from  whence  I  came  is  large, 
and  there  is  no  end  to  that  body,  therefore  I  will  call 
you  Nas-sar-sis, — my  mother's  brother."  And  Klose- 
kur-beh  answered  and  said:  "Natar-wun-sum, —  my 
sister's  son,"  and  the  young  man  said:  "I  owe  my 
existence  to  the  beautiful  foam  of  the  waters.  The 
wind  of  the  heavens  blew,  and  moving  the  waters  so 
that  it  rolled  in  great  rolls  so  that  the  top  broke, 
leaving  the  foam  on  top  the  water,  and  the  noon-day 
sun  shone  on  the  foam  and  the  heat  of  the  sun  warmeth 
the  foam  and  the  warmth  bringeth  life,  and  I  am  he. 
The  wind  of  the  heavens  carried  me  to  the  land,  and  a 
loud  voice  told  me  to  go  forth  in  the  direction  of  my 
face  and  find  my  companions  and  there  abide.  Know 
ing  that  when  I  opened  my  eyes  my  face  was  toward  the 
cold  land  and  I  have  come  forth,  I  am  your  help. 
Klose-kur-beh  lifted  up  his  hands  toward  the  noon-day 
sun,  and  giving  thanks  to  the  Great  Spirit,  immediately 
went  to  the  brook-side,  taking  with  him  a  fragment  of 
the  animal's  meat  and  the  threads  of  the  bark  of  the  soft 
wood  tree  which  had  been  torn  by  the  lightning,  and 
tied  the  fragments  on  one  end  of  the  bark  thread ;  he 
called  loudly  for  the  fishes  to  come,  and  three  obeyed 
him, — one  fish  red,  one  white  and  one  black — Klose- 
kur-beh  casting  the  meat  into  the  water,  saying  :  "One 
of  you,  who  is  willing  to  become  food  for  my  children, 
bite  the  meat  and  I  will  draw  you  to  the  land,  and  you 
shall  be  food  for  my  children."  Immediately  the  red 
fish  did  bite  the  meat  and  Klose-kur-beh  drew  him 
unto  the  land,  and  Klose-kur-beh  said:  "The  two 
fishes  yet  in  the  water  are  food  for  other  men  ;"  and 
2 


18  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN. 

turning  to  the  fishes,  he  commanded  them  to  return  to 
the  deep  water,  and  there  stay  until  called  forth  by 
men,  the  color  of  their  color,  and  the  two  fishes  obeyed 
and  returned  to  deep  water.  Without  killing  the  fish 
with  the  sticks,  No-ka-mi  cooked  it  in  the  fire,  and 
when  it  was  cold  the  three  did  eat,  and  Klose-kur-beh 
called  it  good.  When  another  morrow  came,  and 
when  the  sun  was  highest,  another  person  came  unto 
the  three,  whose  motion  was  gentle,  and  brow  fair. 
Who  greeted  all  with  down-cast  eyes,  saying  "Ni-jun- 
duke" — My  children,  and  Klose-kur-beh  answered  and 
said;  "Nee-gar-oose" — Mother.  The  person  was  a 
young  maiden.  She  opened  her  mouth,  and  with  a 
soft  voice  said  these  words,  "I  have  come  to  stay,  and 
I  have  brought  all  the  color  of  life  on  my  brow ;  Love 
is  mine,  and  I  will  give  it  unto  you,  and  if  you  will 
love  me,  as  I  love  you,  and  grant  my  wish,  all  the 
world  will  love  me,  even  the  beast  will  love  me,  and 
will  steal  my  body  because  they  love  it.  Strength  is 
mine,  and  those  who  can  reach  me  will  get  it.  Peace 
is  mine  and  I  will  bring  content  to  the  heart  that  seeks 
it;  but  woe  unto  the  man,  who  does  not  heed  its 
power,  he  is  a  brute.  There  will  be  many  seventy 
times  seven  persons  who  shall  share  in  it,  therefore 
keep  it  pure.  Because  I  have  no  other  place  to  go, 
and  I  know  no  other  but  you.  I  have  come  ;  I  am 
young  in  age  and  I  am  tender,  yet  m}'  strength  is 
great  and  I  shall  be  felt  all  over  the  world,  because  I 
owe  my  existence  to  the  beautiful  plant  of  the  earth, 
and  as  the  evening  and  morning  dew  falleth  on  the 
leaf  of  the  plant  when  the  sun  was  highest  and  shining 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  19 

on  it,  the  heat  of  the  sun  warmeth  the  dew,  and  the 
warmth  brought  life,  and  I  am  she.  When  I  opened 
my  eyes  my  face  was  toward  the  rising  of  the  sun 
and  a  loud  voice  spoke  unto  me,  saying,  'Go  forth  in 
the  direction  of  thy  face,  and  find  thy  companions.' 
Immediately  I  obeyed ;  because  others  are  coming,  we 
must  prepare  the  way,  so  that  all  that  come  may  abide 
with  us."  Immediately  Klose-kur-beh  lifteth  up  his 
hands  toward  the  sun  when  it  was  highest  and  with  a 
loud  yoioe  praised  the  Great  Spirit  for  having  fulfilled 
all  the  promises  he  had  made  unto  him,  and  Klose-kur- 
beh  bowed  his  head  low  giving  four  thanks  to  the 
Great  Spirit,  one  toward  the  rising  of  the  sun — one 
toward  the  setting  of  the  sun — one  toward  the  noon 
day  sun — one  toward  the  cold  land,  and  immediately 
went  forth  to  the  thick  growth  of  bushes  and  from  the 
branches  of  the  bushes,  picked  Par-gun-sal, — nuts,  and 
brought  them  forth  to  the  young  man  and  commanded 
him  to  break  the  nuts  with  Pen-nep-skole, — stones,  so 
that  the  young  maiden  may  eat.  The  young  man 
obeyed,  and  the  four  persons  did  eat  of  the  nuts ;  and 
before  the  sun's  shadow  was  too  far  toward  the  rising 
of  the  sun,  Klose-kur-beh  bade  the  three  to  come  forth 
and  face  the  noon,  and  there  join  hands  and  give  thanks 
to  the  Great  Spirit,  in  the  name  of  the  substance  that 
bore  them ;  and  the  three  obeyed,  and  the  words  of 
thanks  repeated  came  from  the  mouth  of  Klose-kur-beh. 
Thus  the  first  coming  of  the  people  to  the  Red-man's 
world  began. 

At   this  period  Klose-kur-beh  assigns  the  duties  of 
each  person,  and  the  assignment  was  made  according 


20  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED   MAN. 

to  the  coming  of  each.  He  says,  "Because  the  sub 
stance  that  brought  us  to  life  is  the  substance  of  this 
world,  therefore  we  must  always  hold  ourselves  as  a 
part  of  the  world,  because  we  are  substance  of  it.  I 
arose  from  the  dust  of  the  earth,  I  must  see  to  it,  so 
that  the  earth  may  be  clear  of  all  obstacles,  and  the 
land  be  our  home,  and  a  home  for  the  people  who  will 
come  after  us.  We  must  not  believe  our  thoughts  if 
they  tell  us  we  are  to  live  always,  because  in  one  of 
the  seventy  times  seven  nights  the  Great  Spirit,  spake 
unto  me,  saying,  'Man  must  not  expect  to  live 
always,'  and  on  other  nights  the  Great  Spirit  continued 
upon  the  same  subject,  so  all  that  was  said  to  me,  I  am 
able  to  say  to  you,  and  my  words  are  many.  While  I 
labor  in  purifying  the  land  No-ka-mi  will  keep  my 
house  and  prepare  the  food  for  eating,  and  the  young 
man,  because  he  is  quick  in  motion,  he  shall  go  forth 
and  bring  unto  No-ka-mi  all  that  he  gets  in  hunting ;  he 
shall  bring  it  for  food  ;  he  shall  first  kill  the  animal 
with  the  bow  made  of  hard  wood  ;  he  shall  bend  the 
wood,  and  the  spring  of  the  wood  will  have  strength 
so  it  will  send  forth  the  arrow  and  the  bow  shall  have 
power  so  that  the  arrow  will  have  force  to  kill." 

"The  young  maiden,  because  she  is  tender  and  with 
fair  brow  ; — she  shall  be  the  brightness  of  our  house  ; 
she  shall  welcome  all  that  come  to  abide  with  us ;  and 
because  her  strength  is  great,  and  must  be  felt  all  over 
the  land,  she  shall  give  it  to  those  who  come,  because 
none  can  abide  without  it.  Strength  is  hers  because 
she  is  the  seed  of  the  world.  Four  kinds  shall  the 
people  see  moving  in  this  world ;  four  seeds  the  Great 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED  MAN.  21 

Spirit  gave  unto  it.  From  one  seed  is  man ;  from 
another  seed  are  the  beasts  and  animals ;  from  another 
seed  the  fowl  of  the  air,  and  from  another  the  fishes  of 
the  water.  Every  seed  shall  bear  after  its  kind. 
Because  the  Great  Spirit  made  the  man,  in  his  own 
image,  he  will  give  unto  him  in  due  season  the  power 
over  all  others  that  come  from  the  other  seeds.  But 
in  the  beginning,  the  Great  Spirit  gave  greater  strength 
to  the  beast  than  he  did  the  man.  This  is  done  only 
to  show  that  the  world  rests  in  His  will,  and  the  power 
of  man  and  beast  is  subject  to  change ;  and  the  Great 
Spirit  calls  this  wisdom,  who  said,  'If  I  give  an  endless 
power  to  one,  he  will  claim  it  as  his  own  and  forget 
that  it  came  from  Me.'  The  Great  Spirit  said  again, 
4 1  will  warn  the  one  in  power  before  I  bring  the 
change  unto  him.  I  have  given  the  beast,  the  fowl, 
and  the  fish,  greater  strength  than  man.  But  a  spirit 
from  me  has  gone  forth  unto  them,  telling  them,  that 
I  will  give  the  greater  power  unto  man,  and  in  due 
season,  each  one  shall,  by  the  bidding  of  man  lay 
down  at  his  feet.  Power  is  sweet  and  all  shall  strug 
gle  for  it,  and  happy  are  they  who  find  it.  But  a 
great  sorrow  and  anger  shall  come  unto  those  who 
lose  it ;  therefore  beware ;  and  make  it  known  among 
you  that  the  beasts,  fowl  and  fishes,  are  in  great  anger 
and  seek  your  life.  They  are  seeking  an  opportunity 
to  show  revenge  by  violence ;  therefore  mingle  not 
with  them,  but  meet  them  only  as  enemies,  until  the 
change  has  been  made." 

After  this  the  Great  Spirit  spoke  again  unto  me, 
saying,    " Great  will  be  the  period  when    the   power 


22  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OP   THE  RED   MAN. 

will  change  from  beast  to  man  ;  but  greater  will  it  be, 
when  the  power  changes  from  man  to  man.  Because 
in  changing  the  power  from  the  beast  to  man  I  have 
the  man  to  do  my  work,  but  when  the  change  is  made 
between  man  and  man  I  shall  have  to  do  the  work  with 
my  own  hands.  There  will  be  father,  mother,  sons 
and  daughters,  yet  all  must  be  brothers  and  sisters ; 
because  all  are  from  the  dust,  stone,  water,  and 
the  plants  of  the  earth,  and  all  live,  are  fed  and 
get  strength  from  the  same  air  brought  by  the  wind 
from  heaven." 

While  yet  the  Great  Spirit  was  speaking  to  me  he 
said  this,  "All  living  things  shall  know  their  kind, 
and  shall  go  in  mates,  and  after  that  there  will  be  in 
the  land  great  numbers ;  yet  each  shall  know  his  mate, 
and  because  the  man  shall  have  power  over  all  living 
things^'it  is  good  that  he  be  mated.  The  man  shall 
be  mate  for  the  woman  and  the  woman  shall  be  mate 
for  the  man,  and  on  the  morrow  when  the  sun  is  high 
est,  the  man  and  the  woman  shall  go  forth  to  face  the 
sun,  and  the  man  shall  give  his  right  hand  to  the 
woman,  and  the  woman  shall  take  his  right  hand  with 
her  left  hand  and  both  shall  bow  towards  the  sun ; — 
seven  times  shall  they  bow  toward  the  sun  on  each 
morrow ;  and  after  that  they  shall  be  husband  and 
wife, — after  the  passing  of  seven  suns  they  shall  be 
one  flesh,  and  immediately  shall  the  man  walk  seventy 
times  seven  steps  toward  the  noon,  and  there  build  a 
house  made  of  sticks  and  leaves ;  the  door  shall  be 
toward  the  noon  sun  ;  seven  days  shall  he  be  building 
the  house ;  and  on  the  seventh  day  the  woman  shall  go 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN.  23 

forth  among  the  soft  wood  trees  and  break  the  tender 
boughs  of  the  trees,  and  bring  them  to  the  house  and 
lay  them  on  the  ground  for  a  bed  for  the  husband  and 
the  wife  ;  the  woman  shall  there  abide  with  the  man ; 
and  on  the  morrow  the  man  and  the  woman  did  go 
forth  to  make  the  bow,  and  the  man  did  make  the 
house,  and  the  woman  made  the  bed,  and  both  lived 
in  the  house.  After  another  seven  days  had  passed, 
Klose-kur-beh  visited  them  and  began  to  teach  them 
more.  He  gave  the  man  all  the  land  south  of  the 
house  for  his  children,  while  Klose-kur-beh  claimed  all 
the  north  land,  because,  he  came  from  that  way, — 
he  said  to  the  man,  * 'There  will  be  no  more  come 
to  abide  with  me,  and  after  I  teach  your  children, 
and  subdue  the  land,  it  will  be  good  for  me  to 
return  to  the  north-land  and  there  abide.  When  I  go 
to  the  north-land  No-ka-mi  will  go  with  me*  no  other 
person  shall  go,  and  none  shall  know  where  I  abide, 
because  when  one  goes  too  far  towards  my  abiding 
place  he  shall  not  live  to  get  back ;  and  as  nature 
feedeth  ambition  many  will  not  be  able  to  resist  the 
the  temptation  of  gaining  more  of  the  world,  but  will 
go  forth  toward  me  only  to  perish  ;  yet  others  will  not 
take  this  warning  but  will  follow  those  who  have 
perished,  until  the  north-land  shall  no  longer  exist; 
But  before  I  go  to  the  north-land  the  Great  Spirit 
charged  me  to  teach  you  this — 'When  you  are  in 
hunger,  take  your  bow  and  go  forth  and  kill  such 
animals  as  you  need  for  food  and  bring  them  unto  the 
woman  who  shall  prepare  the  meat  for  food,  and  you 
shall  prepare  the  skins  to  cover  your  bodies  and  bed. 


24  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN. 

I  have  many  words  to  say,  therefore  I  shall  come 
and  teach  you  these  same  things  on  every  seventh  day, 
and  this  day  shall  be  one  of  the  seventh.  On  the 
other  seventh  days  I  shall  repeat  all  my  sayings  so 
you  will  be  able  to  repeat  them  to  your  children  and 
your  children  to  their  children,  until  the  things  of  the 
world  will  get  so  sweet  to  the  people  they  will  forget 
the  words  of  the  Great  Spirit  and  shall  begin  to  teach 
their  children  only  on  things  they  see  in  the  world. 
When  that  day  comes,  I  shall  return  from  the  north- 
land  to  teach  you  more.  Klose-kur-beh  then  said  unto 
the  Woman,  "You  are  to  be  the  first  mother  of  the 
children  that  are  to  come,  you  shall  bear  unto  your 
husband  seven  sons  and  seven  daughters  and  their  chil 
dren  shall  become  seven  tribes,  and  from  these  seven 
tribes,  many  times  seven  tribes  shall  come  until  they 
cover  the  land.  After  you  shall  have  borne  the  seven 
sons  and  seven  daughters,  a  spirit  will  come  to  you,  in 
your  sleep,  and  tell  you  what  to  do,  so  that  you  can 
be  with  your  children  and  their  children  while  the  earth 
stands. 

When  first  I  met  you  all, — the  first  who  came  was 
the  woman,  but  with  you,  the  first  child  you  shall  bear, 
shall  be  born  man,  and  the  second  shall  be  woman. 
There  shall  be  a  man  born,  before  every  woman,  and 
the  first  born  man,  shall  take  unto  himself  a  wife,  who 
shall  be  of  the  fourth  born  woman  ;  the  second  shall 
take  the  fifth ;  the  third  shall  take  the  sixth ;  the 
fourth  shall  take  the  seventh  ;  the  fifth  shall  take  the 
first ;  the  sixth  shall  take  the  second,  and  the  seventh 
man  shall  take  the  third  woman ;  it  will  not  be  good 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  25 

for  them,  ,if  they  will  not  obey  this  order ;  because  if 
the  first  born  man,  take  the  first  born  woman  for  wife, 
she  will  be  too  near  kin  unto  him,  and  they  shall  be  at 
the  head  of  a  weak  generation.  So  forget  not  my  say 
ing,  because  obedience  is  sweet  and  gives  strength  to 
generations  who  practice  it."  Then  Klose-kur-beh 
said  to  the  man,  "Before  I  teach  you  many  things,  go 
forth  to  the  soft  wood  tree  by  the  brook-side  that  has 
been  torn  by  the  ball  of  fire  ;  take  up  one  fragment  of 
the  wood  that  have  been  torn  from  the  tree  in  your 
right  hand,  and  face  the  noon  and  dip  the  wood  in  the 
water  in  remembrance  of  your  origin,  and  bring  the 
wood  to  me.  And  because  No-ka-mi  owes  her  origin 
to  the  stone,  1  have  sent  her  after  a  fragment  of  the 
stone,  and  because  she  is  of  the  stone,  knows  the 
nature  of  it,  and  will  bring  forth  such  is  needed  to  do 
our  work."  When  the  man  had  come  with  the  wood, 
No-ka-mi  also  came  with  the  stone,  and  immediately 
Klose-kur-beh  began  to  break  the  stone  with  the  frag 
ment  of  the  wood  saying,  "I  shall  make  these  things 
out  of  stone,  so  that  we,  and  the  children  to  come  after 
us,  shall  have  tools  to  use ;"  and  Klose-kur-beh  did 
shave  the  stone  into  all  kinds  of  tools  for  the  people  to 
use.  And  said  unto  the  man,  "Take  these  imple 
ments  of  stone,  and  you  shall  share  with  me  the 
power  given  me  by  the  Great  Spirit.  You  shall  be 
able  to  cut  the  hard  wood  tree  and  make  for  yourselves 
and  those  who  come  after  you,  bows  to  shoot  with, 
also  vessels  that  will  bear  you  upon  the  water. 
Before  I  leave  you  to  go  to  the  north-land  I  shall 
give  you  the  same  power  I  now  have,  so  you  also  may 


26  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN. 

be  able  to  shave  the  stone  into  tools  as  you  have  seen 
me  do  this  day.  One  particular  duty  above  all  I  must 
mention  and  you  must  obey ;  that  is,  you  must  teach 
the  people  never  to  leave  this  land  to  seek  other  lands ; 
so  when  you  make  yourself  a  vessel  let  it  be  so  made 
that  it  will  only  be  large  enough  to  serve  you  on  the 
rivers  and  lakes,  because  when  I  first  opened  my  eyes 
I  beheld  large  bodies  of  water  all  around  the  land 
upon  which  we  move  and  stand ;  and  in  the  seventy 
times  seven  nights  the  Great  Spirit  said  unto  me, 
'There  shall  be  other  people  live  on  the  land  as  well  as 
your  people.'" 

And  this  I  learned  from  the  Great  Spirit, — that  he 
made  another  man  like  me,  but  that  he  bade  him  go 
toward  the  setting  of  the  sun,  and  he  shall  some  day 
come  to  this  land  from  the  rising  of  the  sun — There 
must  be  still  another  man  in  some  other  part  of  the 
world ;  because  when  I  called  forth  the  fishes  as  food 
for  man,  three  kinds  obeyed — one  red  fish — one  white 
fish — one  black  fish.  The  white  fish  and  the  black  fish 
are  yet  in  the  deep  water,  waiting  to  be  called  forth  by 
men  of  their  color.  These  men  shall  be  one  white  and 
one  black.  And  further  there  shall  be  three  seasons, 
a  season  for  each  man.  One  shall  be  for  the  growing 
of  plants,  and  this  growing  season  shall  be  pleasant  to 
mankind,  because  it  will  bring  forth  many  beautiful 
colors,  pleasing  to  the  eye.  There  shall  be  a  season 
when  the  plants  shall  be  gathered  as  the  people  wants 
them,  and  every  plant  shall  show  when  it  is  ready  to  be 
gathered,  it  will  turn  dark  in  color;  after  this 
season  has  passed,  the  last  season  shall  come, — a  season 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED  MAN.  27 

when  everything  must  be  prepared  for  its  coming.  The 
one  who  is  not  prepared  for  it  shall  suffer  in  many 
ways ;  cold  and  hungry  shall  he  be,  because  the  season 
that  is  to  come  shall  destroy  everything  ;  therefore  take 
warning  ;  when  you  see  the  plants  taking  in  its  beautiful 
color,  and  the  trees  shake  off  their  green  leaves,  then 
the  last  season  is  at  hand,  then  shall  its  breath  be  felt. 
Even  the  rivers  and  the  lakes  shall  close  up  its  waters 
to  keep  the  fishes  in  the  deep.  Then  shall  come  the 
last  season  in  its  white  robe,  which  shall  cover  the 
whole  land  and  shall  occupy  it  five  moons.  All  this' 
shall  come  once  in  every  twelve  moons.  The  growing 
season  shall  be  the  Red  man's  season.  The  gathering 
season  shall  be  the  Black  man's  season,  and  the  cold 
season  shall  be  the  White  man's  season.  The  seasons 
were  divided  by  the  Great  Spirit,  and  because  the  Red 
man  obeyed  the  first  teaching  given  unto  him,  he  shall 
enjoy  a  pleasant  one.  And  because  the  Black  man  did 
not  obey  when  told  to  look  upon  the  earth  when  he 
first  opened  his  eyes,  he  shall  always  wait  to  follow 
the  bidding  of  his  brother  ;  and  because  the  White  man 
wanted  to  stay  on  the  land  where  he  first  opened  his 
eyes  and  wanted  the  Great  Spirit  to  give  him  all  he 
beheld,  the  Great  Spirit  bade  him  go  toward  the  setting 
of  the  sun.  The  Great  Spirit  saw  that  the  man  he  had 
made  wanted  the  whole  world,  therefore  he  sent  him  to 
chase  the  sun  ;  when  he  comes  to  the  great  waters  he 
shall  make  large  vessels,  so  he  can  chase  the  sun  across 
the  great  waters,  because  he  wants  all  the  world ;  he 
shall  slay  his  brother  because  he  wants  all  things ;  he 
shall  know  no  one  because  he  wants  the  power  over  all 


28  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE  BED   MAN. 

the  earth.  The  first  born  shall  slay  the  next  kindred 
to  himself  for  the  want  of  power  and  possession. 
Power  and  possession  shall  be  so  sweet  to  him,  that  it 
will  turn  his  nature  to  disobedience ;  even  the  first 
woman  shall  disobey  the  Great  Spirit,  and  bring  death 
unto  mankind, — who  shall  be  sent  forth  to  seek  food- 
He  will  not  heed  the  sayings  and  warnings  of  the  Great 
Spirit  but  shall  continue  in  the  ways  that  he  likes, 
until  the  Great  Spirit  shall  be  so  provoked  he  will  send  a 
great  rush  of  water,  and  all  the  bad  shall  be  drowned, — 
but  a  few  saved,  who  will  continue  to  live  good,  and 
shall  increase  until  they  be  like  the  sand  of  the  earth ; 
and  shall  be  able  to  use  all  things  for  their  convenience 
and  comfort.  Great  men  shall  be  put  to  rule,  and  the 
rulers  shall  be  many  ;  each  ruler  will  want  all  the  power 
over  the  others;  this  the  Great  Spirit  will  call  bad, 
and  the  Great  Spirit  will  come  among  them  in  the 
form  of  a  man  like  unto  themselves,  and  will  stay 
among  them,  and  teach  them  the  way  he  wishes  them 
to  live.  But  their  love  of  power  will  be  so  great  they 
will  slay  the  great  spirit  unto  death.  The  Great  Spirit 
will  show  them  that  man  hath  not  the  power  to  destroy 
him,  and  he  shall  arise  before  them,  and  shall  go  up 
beyond  their  reach.  His  teaching  to  them  shall  be 
hard  to  understand  because  they  did  not  stop  to  listen 
to  his  words  while  he  taught  them.  The  Great  Spirit 
who  is  so  good,  will  show  them  that,  revenge  is  not 
good,  and  he  will  let  them  occupy  the  land  for  the  pur 
pose  of  mending  their  ways.  He  will  only  say  to  them 
that  He  will  never  come  to  them  again  in  peace  and 
that  they  shall  not  come  to  Him  until  they  come  like 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED  MAN.  29 

the  little  babes.  A  line  shall  be  drawn  between  Him 
self  and  them — humiliation  and  obedience  only  will 
save  them.  The  sweetness  of  the  earth  and  love  of 
power  will  destroy  them.  Before  the  day  of  destruc 
tion  comes,  this  man  shall  have  enjoyed  all  the  power 
and  possession  he  desires,  and  he  shall  have  tasted  the 
sweetness  of  the  earth.  When  he  sleeps  he  shall  sleep 
on  a  bed  of  flowers  scented  with  roses,  he  need  only 
reach  forth  his  hand  to  grasp  all  things  for  his  comfort ; 
he  will  draw  things  for  his  convenience  from  the  water, 
from  the  air,  and  from  deep  down  in  the  earth  ;  and 
the  Great  Spirit  shall  be  looking  on ;  for  this  is  the 
time  that  the  man  is  about  to  forget  the  death  of  the 
Great  Spirit — The  man  not  having  repented,  is  to  dig  a 
pit  in  the  water,  the  air,  and  the  earth,  wherein  he 
shall  fall.  After  he  shall  have  dug  these  pits,  then  the 
Great  Spirit  shall  show  the  man  His  power.  He  shall 
shake  the  earth,  because  the  substance  of  the  water, 
air  and  earth  have  been  drawn  out,  and  used  for 
comfort  sake,  and  all  these  things  have  been  left  like 
the  empty  hornet's  nest  shall  cave  into  these  great 
pits,  and  the  people  shall  fall  into  them,  like  the  sand  ; 
And  the  powerful  man  shall  be  no  more — Then  the 
Great  Spirit  shall  call  me  forth,  toward  the  noon  sun, 
to  teach  you  more.  The  putting  to  death  of  the  Great 
Spirit  will  come  to  pass,  in  a  far  off  land. 


30  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN. 


CHAPTER  II. 

With  the    aid   of  May  May,  Klose-kur-beh  destroyed  the   Serpent. —  The 
Sea  Voyage. 

BECAUSE  I  make  mention  of  the  awful  day  coming 
you  must  not  make  yourself  afraid,  as  the  Great  Spirit 
will  not  bring  this  upon  you,  or  your  children.  It  will 
always  be  plain  to  you  that  your  brother  and  you  are 
two ;  you  are  red,  and  he  white.  The  Great  Spirit 
has  established  His  number  with  you  both.  His  num 
ber  with  you  is  seven,  while  with  your  brother  it  shall 
be  three,  and  because  his  numbers  are  few,  he  shall 
live  fast,  and  pass  away  quickly ;  and  because  your 
numbers  are  many  you  shall  live  slowy,  and  shall  linger 
along  while  beyond  your  brother.  All  these  bad 
things  will  come  to  pass  across  the  big  water,  therefore 
I  must  warn  you  not  to  build  large  vessels  that  will 
bear  you  across,  so  that  you  will  not  have  a  hand  in 
taking  the  life  of  the  Great  Spirit.  When  the  Great 
Spirit  sees  that  you  obey  this  warning  you  will  escape 
His  wrath,  and  He  will  show  you  how  much  He  loves 
you  ;  He  will  cause  your  children  to  be  born  in  the 
same  form  in  which  He  made  the  first  man.  There 
will  not  be  a  child  born  deformed,  neither  will  any  be 
killed  by  lightning ;  they  shall  escape  the  floods  and 
earthquakes,  and  when  the  beast  bites  you,  you  will  not 
go  crazy  with  him,  though  crazy  he  be ;  and  wtTen  you 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN.  31 

cut  your  hand  or  your  foot,  your  jaws  will  not  close  up 
like  the  beasts.  These  promises  shall  be  with  you  as 
long  as  you  keep  yourselves  within  the  bounds  of  my 
teaching.  Knowing  that  many  temptations  will  come 
to  you — you  shall  become  weak  in  mind,  and  shall 
want  to  believe  some  other  teachings,  it  is  well  for  me 
to  say  to  you,  that  the  white  man  will  feel  it  as  a  duty 
to  his  children  to  seek  new  lands  for  them,  and  that  he 
will  not  rest  until  he  finds  the  land  the  Great  Spirit 
gave  unto  you.  He  shall  not  pass  away  without  first 
having  put  his  foot  upon  all  the  lands  that  have  been 
made  ;  therefore  look  for  him  always. 

The  first  sign  of  his  coming  shall  appear  to  you  in 
the  form  of  a  swan  towards  the  rising  of  the  sun ;  this 
shall  be  his  bird  and  you  shall  know  it,  because  it  will 
be  white.  If  his  coming  proves  an  injury  to  your  chil 
dren,  drive  him  away ;  and  if  the  power  given  unto 
you,  bye  and  bye,  is  not  strong  enough  send  up  a  cry 
to  the  north-land,  and  you  shall  get  help ;  and  when 
the  help  comes  he  shall  flee  to  his  own  land,  and  when 
he  has  fled,  all  the  fragments  he  has  left  behind  him 
you  take  and  keep,  and  use  it  to  protect  your  children, 
because  it  shall  be  the  first  fragment  of  contention. 

When  he  brings  his  women  and  children,  he  will 
come  to  stay,  and  he  shall  want  all  the  land,  because 
the  land  will  be  so  sweet  to  him.  The  first  that  come 
shall  not  want  to  allow  his  own  kind  to  share  with 
him  ;  they  shall  slay  one  another  for  the  possession 
of  it.  Take  no  hand  in  their  fights,  because  the  Great 
Spirit  did  not  make  the  land  for  brothers  to  tight  for ; 
He  made  it  for  love's  sake. 


32  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN. 

Woe  unto  you  when  the  temptation  overpowers 
you  and  you  take  hand  in  his  fights,  because  he  shall 
have  the  way  that  he  can  put  you  in  front  of  him,  and 
you  shall  receive  all  the  blows  and  be  slain  for  his 
gain;  and  the  two  brothers  shall  make  peace  between 
themselves  over  your  body  that  has  been  slain  for 
the  land  because  you  have  forgotten  my  teaching.  I 
must  say  to  you,  watch  him  closely,  because  the  repent 
ance  he  is  to  undergo  is  great,  and  he  will  ask  you  to 
help  him  repent,  and  he  will  say  to  you  that  the 
"Great  Spirit  died  for  him,"  he  will  show  you  the 
things  that  caused  the  death  of  the  Great  Spirit  and  he 
will  teach  you  to  bow  down*  to  these  things  ;  and  bow 
you  may  ;  but  never  forget  that  the  Great  Spirit  is  in 
the  air,  in  the  sun,  moon,  and  in  all  things  which  your 
eyes  can  see. — Here  the  teaching  of  Klose-kur-beh 
ended. 

I  shall  now  enter  into  the  details  of  his  works. 
First  he  made  the  woman  to  select  a  hard  wood  tree 
for  him  to  cut,  and  he  went  forth,  and  began  to  cut  the 
tree  into  pieces  with  the  stone  implement  he  had 
made ;  he  cut  this  only  to  show  the  man  how  the 
tools  must  be  used,  and  then  he  gave  the  implement  to 
the  man  and  bade  him  to  go  forth,  and  make  for  him 
self  things  he  needed ;  in  making  the  necessaries  of 
life,  he  told  him  to  take  the  skin  off  the  white  wood 
tree,  and  make  for  himself  a  vessel  that  will  bear  him 
upon  the  water.  And  said  unto  the  man  I  shall  now 
clean  the  earth  of  all  obstacles,  and  shall  also  continue 
to  make  for  you  and  your  children,  all  the  tools  of 
stone  until  such  time  a  power  be  given  you,  to  make 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OP   THE  RED   MAN.  33 

them  yourselves.  Now  when  you  make  the  bow  to 
shoot  with  make  an  arrow  also,  and  make  it  so  that  the 
end  next  toward  the  animal  be  pointed ;  you  shall 
burn  the  end  so  it  shall  be  hard,  and  when  you  send  it 
forth  it  will  penetrate  into  the  body  and  the  animal 
shall  fall  dead  so  that  you  can  prepare  it  for  food. 
Fish  you  can  not  shoot  with  a  bow  and  arrow  ;  there 
fore  you  must  kill  a  bird,  and  take  from  the  bird's 
breast  next  to  the  neck,  a  small  bone  you  shall  find 
which  is  bent,  and  having  two  prongs, — rub  one  prong 
upon  a  stone  so  it  will  wear  to  a  sharp  point ;  and  you 
shall  strip  the  bark  of  a  small  bush  of  the  Wik-a-bee 
kind,  and  work  it  into  fine  strings,  and  twist  the 
strings  so  it  will  make  a  long  line,  and  the  line  you 
shall  fasten  unto  the  blunt  end  of  the  bone,  and  you 
shall  cut  a  small  pole  of  the  hard  wood  tree,  and 
fasten  the  other  end  of  the  line  on  to  the  small  end  of 
the  pole,  and  you  shall  put  fragments  of  meat  on  the 
sharp  point  of  the  bone,  and  go  and  cast  the  meat 
into  the  water,  and  the  fish  shall  bite  the  meat  and  shall 
pull  the  meat,  line  and  pole,  then  draw  him  unto  the 
land.  And  when  the  time  comes  that  you  need  a  vessel 
to  bear  you  upon  the  water,  you  shall  first  cut  from  the 
soft  wood  tree,  strips  of  it  so  small  you  can  easily  bend, 
and  the  strips  shall  be  in  length  according  to  the  vessel 
wanted ;  both  ends  shall  come  to  a  point,  so  it  will  cut 
the  water  when  you  make  it  go.  The  vessel  must  be 
propelled  by  the  power  of  your  arms  and  hands  with  a 
paddle  made  from  the  hard  wood  tree. 

Some  thin  strips  of  the  soft  wood  you  shall  shave 
out  for  lining ;  there  shall  be  two  linings,  one  length- 


34  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED  MAN. 

wise,  and  one  cross-wise ;  after  these  are  ready  you 
shall  level  and  smooth  the  ground,  and  lay  the  bark  of 
the  white  wood  tree  on  the  ground,  and  cut  the  bark 
on  each  side,  so  you  can  shape  it  to  a  point  on  each 
end,  and  lay  the  top  frame  on  the  bark  and  then  turn 
up  the  side  flaps  of  the  bark  closely  to  tbe 
frame,  and  you  shall  sew  the  side  flaps  together  with 
strips  of  the  roots  of  the  soft  wood  tree,  and  you  shall 
make  holes  through  the  bark,  with  the  tail  of  the  shell 
fish  So-ba-qui-dole-beh,  "horse  shoe,"  that  you  find  on 
the  sea  shore ;  after  sewing  up  the  seams  you  shall 
raise  the  frame  to  the  top  of  the  bark  and  sew  the  bark 
on  to  the  frame ;  it  will  then  be  ready  to  receive  the 
two  linings ;  and  the  seams  you  shall  close  up  with  the 
sap  of  the  pitch  wood  tree  called  Puk-go,  "pitch," 
so  that  the  water  will  not  enter  into  the  vessel ;  after 
this  is  done  your  vessel  will  be  ready  to  bear  you  upon 
the  water. 

Klose-kur-beh  said,  now  that  you  have  all  your 
"Ar-wa-kur-gan,"  (tools)  to  make  "Ar-quee-dun," 
(canoe)  "Tur-by,"  (bow)  "Par-queh,"  (arrow.)  You 
can  make  all  these  things  when  you  want  them,  and 
when  the  time  comes,  and  before  your  sons  shall  take 
unto  themselves  wives,  each  man  shall  go  forth  into 
the  forest,  with  the  bow  and  arrow  and  eat  what  he 
takes  in  hunting,  and  shall  cover  his  body  with  the 
skins.  Seventy  times  seven  moons  shall  he  be  absent 
from  your  people  ;  he  shall  then  return  and  take  unto 
himself  a  wife.  In  seven  days  when  the  sun  is  highest 
I  will  come  again  to  repeat  to  you  these  same  things. 
Seventy  times  seven,  shall  I  come,  but  before  I  leave 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  35 

you  this  day,  I  will  say,  "The  first  born  you  shall  call 
"Na-mun,"  (son)  and  the  second  shall  be  called 
"Na  Doose"  (daughter.) 

Here  Klose-kur-beh  left  the  husband  and  wife  to 
themselves,  only  returning  every  seventh  day  to  teach 
them  until  the  allotted  time  had  been  fulfilled ;  after 
which  the  man  and  wife  went  their  way,  as  well  as 
Klose-kur-beh  and  No-ka-mi,  so  nothing  remarkable 
can  be  said  of  the  man,  during  a  long  period.  There 
is  much  to  be  said  of  the  woman ;  the  details  of  which 
will  be  given  later. 

First  we  will  examine  the  works  of  Klose-kur-beh, 
because  it  is  clear  that  his  mission  was  to  clean  the 
whole  earth.  He  now  goes  to  work  to  subdue  the 
animals  and  beasts,  so  that  man  will  not  have  much 
trouble  in  conquering  them  afterwards.  In  those  days 
as  has  been  said  before,  the  beast  sought  after  man's 
life,  not  only  devouring  him  when  they  met,  but  also 
roving  through  the  forest  seeking  after  him.  The  man 
and  woman  were  in  constant  fear  lest  they  be 
devoured.  Klose-kur-beh,  who  saw  the  condition 
of  things,  went  forth  to  meet  all  the  ferocious  roving 
beasts ;  he  called  each  one  to  him  and  these  that 
obeyed,  he  asked  if  they  were  willing  to  become  small ; 
and  all  that  came  with  willingness  he  transformed  in 
to  small  animals  and  covered  them  with  fine  fur. 
Those  that  hesitated  and  lingered  behind,  he  changed 
smaller  and  with  coarse  hair.  One  animal  when  asked 
if  he  was  willing  to  be  changed  answered  "No,"  and 
immediately  made  a  leap  upon  the  branches  of  the  tree, 
and  looked  down  upon  Klose-kur-beh  from  the  high 


36  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

branches  and  said,  "When  man  leaps  from  branch 
to  branch  as  I,  then  shall  I  submit  to  his  bidding." 
Then  Klose-kur-beh  said,  " Because  from  the  branches 
of  the  tree  you  choose  to  bark  at  man — be  it  so — but 
as  you  are  to  leap  from  branch  to  branch  your  great 
weight  will  break  the  branches  down  therefore,  you 
need  to  become  small  so  you  can  travel  on  the  branches 
of  the  trees,"  and  immediately  the  animal  became 
small  and  Klose-kur-beh  called  him  "Miqu-go-a" 
(squirrel.)  When  Klose-kur-beh  looked  around  he  saw 
a  very  large  animal,  much  larger  than  those  near  him, 
and  the  form  of  his  body  was  not  like  the  others — his 
back  was  the  shape  of  the  half  moon  with  a  very  small 
head  for  the  body,  with  large  but  thin  ears  hanging 
down  each  side  of  his  head ;  eyes  and  mouth  small  and 
the  upper  lip  so  long  he  could  reach  out  with  it  seven 
paces  and  up  among  the  branches  of  the  trees ;  and 
there  were  two  long  horns  on  each  side  of  his  long  lip. 
When  Klose-kur-beh  called  him  he  would  not  answer, 
but  would  swing  his  long  lip  to  the  right,  then  left,  up, 
then  down,  with  great  force,  shaking  his  head  each 
time.  Seven  times  Klose-kur-beh  called  him  forth— 
seven  times  did  the  animal  show  violence,  and  after 
seven  times  repeating  this  manner  of  disobedience,  said 
to  Klose-kur-beh,  "No,  I  will  not  go  forth  to  man  and 
humble  myself  to  obey  his  bidding ;  I  will  never  obey 
the  bidding  of  my  enemy  as  long  as  he  can  not  show 
the  power  and  strength  that  I  can.  Even  the  trees 
bend  when  I  touch  them  ;  I  can  break  the  branches  with 
my  long  lip  and  tear  up  the  earth  when  I  choose ;  and 
when  I  meet  your  children,  they  can  only  save  them- 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED   MAN.  37 

selves  by  running  out  of  my  way ;  and  woe  unto  them 
that  I  can  reach  with  my  lip,  I  will  dash  them  against 
my  teeth  so  that  my  teeth  will  go  through  them. 
Seven  of  your  children  can  I  hang  on  my  two  teeth 
and  go  my  way  to  meet  more.  Their  weapons  I  do 
not  fear,  because  my  skin  is  so  thick  and  hard  even 
the  hair  will  not  grow  out  of  it ;  and  my  flesh  so  deep 
that  covers  my  life,  there  can  nothing  reach  that  life 
which  can  be  brought  against  it  by  your  children ; 
therefore  I  will  repeat  and  say  no.  Enemies  we  entered 
the  land  and  enemies  let  us  live  in  it;  man,  go  your 
way,  and  I  will  go  my  way."  At  this  saying  Klose- 
kur-beh  paused  with  sorrow ;  immediately  a  spirit 
of  thought  came  unto  him,  and  he  said  to  the  animal — 
"Because  your  body  is  great  you  will  not  come  to  the 
bidding  "of  man — youi4  pride  lay  in  the  thickness  of 
your  skin  and  the  great  depth  of  your  flesh.  This 
is  vanity,  "pride  will  stand  only  for  a  moment,"  and 
woe  unto  you  "Par-sar-do-kep-piart." — mammoth,  for 
in  a  little  while,  your  pride  will  fall  with  your  body. 
This  will  show  my  children  that  there  is  a  power 
somewhere  which  is  far  greater  than  your  power  that 
can  protect  them  from  any  violence  you  can  press 
against  them.  There  will  be  no  need  of  teaching  a 
lesson  to  those  that  will  come  after  you,  because  there 
will  be  none,  because  when  the  power  does  its  work, 
it  will  be  final,  none  of  your  kind  will  escape,  but 
will  all  perish  alike.  My  children  shall  stand  around 
and  gaze  upon  your  bones  ;  and  the  bones  will  last 
as  long  as  the  world  stands,  but  your  skin  and  flesh 
that  gives  you  so  much  pride  will  never  be  seen 


38  LIFE   AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

by  any  of  my  children,"  and  immediately  a  dark 
cloud  arose  from  the  setting  of  the  sun  approaching 
very  low  toward  where  Klose-kur-beh  and  the  animal 
was  standing,  and  a  loud  voice  came  unto  Klose-kur- 
beh,  saying,  "Depart  from  the  spot  immediately, — 
you  and  the  animals  that  obey  you,  because  the 
howling  of  the  brute  will  be  great ;  but  greater  will 
be  the  roaring  of  the  heavens,  to  drown  his  howls ;" 
and  Klose-kur-beh  obeyed  the  warning  and  departed 
with  all  the  animals  that  obeyed  him,  and  immediately 
the  clouds  began  to  roar  very  loud  all  over  the  heavens 
and  the  lightning  shooting  in  every  direction,  and  the 
howling  of  the  animal  was  heard  no  more.  When 
the  clouds  passed  away  there  was  a  great  calm ;  and 
when  the  night  came,  the  heavens  at  the  north  land 
began  to  turn  into  a  beautiful  white,  and  the  white 
began  to  dance  among  the  stars  of  the  heaven,  dancing 
toward  the  noon,  until  the  white  covered  all  the 
heavens,  and  Klose-kur-beh  called  it,  "Nee-bur- 
bann  ; — night  dawn,"  or  the  northern  lights. 

After  this  great  event  Klose-kur-beh  rested  seven 
moons ;  and  after  resting  seven  moons  he  went 
forth  to  clear  the  water,  and  to  clear  the  rivers 
and  lakes  of  its  obstruction.  To  do  this  it  was  neces 
sary  that  he  should  make  for  himself  a  canoe  of  bark, 
and  to  make  it  in  the  same  manner  that  he  taught  the 
man.  After  he  had  made  the  canoe,  and  put  it  in  the 
water  he  went  forth  upon  the  water  to  find  obstructions. 
He  found  branches  and  roots  of  trees  in  all  the  rivers 
and  lakes  so  that  the  canoe  could  not  pass,  because 
every  branch  that  had  fallen  into  the  water,  had  more 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN.  39 

life  than  the  ones  on  the  land,  the  water  gave  to  it 
more  life  than  the  land  did ;  when  he  began  to  tear  up 
the  branches,  the  parts  that  lay  next  to  the  bottom  had 
sprouted  and  rooted  fast  on  to  the  bottom ;  but  with 
the  aid  of  the  spiritual  Power,  he  was  able  to  dislodge 
every  branch.  Not  only  the  branches  that  lay  at  the 
bottom  of  the  rivers  sprouted,  but  the  virtue  of  the 
water  gave  great  growth  to  them  so  that  they  reached 
from  one  shore  to  the  other  shore  of  the  rivers ;  like 
wise  he  found  things  the  same  upon  all  the  lakes. 
Although  having  such  spiritual  power,  that  had  he 
wished,  he  could  with  one  stroke  of  his  hand  remove 
all  obstructions ;  but  no, — such  was  not  his  object ; 
he  wanted  to  show  the  man  that  he  must  not  always 
wait  for  spiritual  help,  but  do  the  things  with  his  own 
labor,  only  appealing  to  spiritual  power  when  necessity 
required  it.  Therefore  when  the  allotted  seventy 
times  seven  moons  had  ended,  his  work  was  not 
finished,  and  he  marvelled  with  a  great  sorrow  at  the 
slowness  of  his  work.  Immediately  there  came  a 
voice  from  the  heavens  saying,  " Marvel  not  man,  at 
the  slowness  of  your  work,  because  you  must  know, 
that  the  work  of  man  under  the  water  must  not  be  the 
same  as  on  the  land ;  man  must  not  be  hasty  when  he 
works  under  the  water,  because  if  he  be  hasty  he  will 
only  bring  death  unto  himself.  Therefore  do  your 
work  slowly  so  that  when  your  work  is  done  it  will 
last  forever.  Therefore  you  are  allowed  seven  times 
the  allotted  time  of  seventy  times  seven  to  do  your 
work,  so  marvel  not,  but  go  on  with  good  cheer 
because  this  work  must  be  done  now,  and  after  it  is 


40  [LIFE  AND^TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

finished  nature  will  not  obstruct  the  waters,  and  no 
more  such  work  be  wanted  done.  Hereafter  when 
man  works  under  the  water  it  will  be  only  to  find  the 
things  he  had  dropped  there,"  and  Klose-kur-beh 
obeyed  the  voice  from  Heaven,  and  went  on  cheerfully 
with  his  work.  How  long  a  time  it  took  him  to  finish 
the  work  he  seemed  to  have  kept  that  to  himself. 

All  these  things  Klose-kur-beh  did  without  having  a 
war  with  anything  until  his  labors  were  completed.  But 
upon  returning  to  his  people  from  his  work  by  way  of 
the  sea  he  found  the  waters  very  dark  in  color  and  the 
stench  of  it  was  great,  because  there  had  been  a  great 
calm  over  all  the  sea,  following  the  destruction  of  the 
"Par-sar-do-kep-piart," — Mammoth,  and  the  danc 
ing  of  the  "Nee-bur-bann," — Northern  lights,  conse 
quently  the  waters  became  stagnant  and  foul.  And  as 
he  moved  along  he  saw  a  serpent  at  a  long  distance, 
as  it  lay  on  the  surface  of  the  dark  water.  Upon 
nearing  the  monster,  it  raised  its  head  and  began  to 
run  out  its  firelike  tongue  rapidly  at  him ;  by  this 
action  he  was  well  aware  that  this  was  another  deadly 
enemy  ;  so  he  steered  his  canoe  directly  for  the  monster 
and  the  serpent  reared  up  in  a  fearful  manner  and 
seemed  ready  to  crush  the  canoe  and  the  man,  but  at 
that  moment  "May-May,"— " Red  headed  wood  pecker" 
flew  between  the  man  and  the  serpent  and  danced  in 
the  air  for  awhile,  seemed  undecided  which  way  to  fly 
until  it  saw  the  serpent  make  for  the  man,  then  the 
bird  flew  toward  the  man  and  lit  upon  the  bow  end  of 
the  canoe  and  said  to  him,  "Be  quick  and  take  your 
bow  and  shoot  the  arrow  at  the  smallest  part  of  the 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  .     41 

reptile's  body,"  and  Klose-kur-beh  obeyed  the  bird  and 
shot  the  arrow  but  it  only  rebounded  without  doing 
the  intended  execution,  and  the  bird  flew,  picked  up 
and  brought  back  the  arrow,  saying,  "Aim  nearer  the 
tail,"  the  arrow  went  again  only  to  rebound  as  before. 
Six  times  this  was  repeated  and  six  times  met  with  the 
same  results,  but  on  the  seventh/ the  ^bird  flew  in 
advance  of  the  arrow  and  with  its  beak  pointed  to 
Klose-hur-beh  where  to  aim,  Klose-kur-beh  obeyed 
and  sent  the  arrow  swiftly  to  the  spot  very 
near  the  end  of  the  tail ;  this  broke  the  serpent's  back 
bone,  which  caused  him  to  recoil  in  death. 

In  the  excitement  caused  by  this  determined  effort 
on  the  part  of  both  man  and  serpent  while  struggling 
for  an  ascendency  over  each  other,  Klose-kur-beh  did 
not  notice  what  was  following  the  conquest  just  gained, 
until  uMay-May," — wood-pecker,  called  his  attention 
to  it,  and  upon  looking  around  he  beheld  that  the 
whole  sea  was  in  blood,  and  the  body  of  the  serpent 
just  slain  laying  on  the  surface,  its  head  toward  the 
land,  and  many  times  seventy  smaller  reptiles  coming 
out  of  its  mouth,  all  heading  for  the  land ;  May-May 
said,  "Let  them  go  in  peace,  they  can  never  grow  large 
enough  to  do  you  harm  as  long  as  they  stay  on  the 
land,"  and  Klose-kur-beh  did  let  them  go  in  peace  as 
May-May  commanded,  and  after  these  sayings  May-may 
wanted  Klose-kur-beh  to  put  a  mark  upon  him  for  his  ser 
vices  in  helping  the  man  complete  his  work  of  subduing 
the  earth.  In  obedience  to  May-May's  wishes,  Klose- 
kur-beh  turned  his  canoe  which  was  then  heading  for  the 
north  land,  and  made  the  bow  point  toward  the  noon, 
looked  up,  and  with  his  right  hand  dipped  the  head 


42  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

of  the  arrow  into  the  sea  of  blood  and  put  the  blood  on 
May-May's  head  as  a  mark  of  true  friendship.  When 
this  was  done,  the  whole  sea  became  clear  and 
pure,  and  May-May  said,  "Because  the  serpent  has 
chosen  the  sea  as  the  battle  ground  to  fight  the  man, 
and  as  its  blood  been  spilt  in  the  sea,  let  the  water  be 
bitter  to  taste  so  that  no  man  or  beast  shall  want  to 
drink  it," — and  it  was  so.  After  this  May-May,  the  bird, 
said  to  Klose-kur-beh,  "In  friendship  we  came  unto  the 
world,  and  in  friendship  let  us  live  in  it.  Because  you 
did  not  call  me  nor  any  of  my  kind  when  you  were 
changing  all  the  animals  and  beasts — making  them 
smaller,  I  have  been  watching  the  movements  of  your 
enemies,  and  I  have  seen  that  the  serpent  was  very 
mad  when  the  power  of  the  Great  Spirit  destroyed  the 
existence  of  "Par-sar-do-kep-piart"  and  his  wrath  has 
been  so  great  that  he  came  here  where  he  thought  no 
power  could  reach  him  because  when  the  rush  of  clouds 
and  wind  comes  he  can  sink  himself  to  the  bottom 
out  of  harm's  way,  and  here  he  has  been  waiting  many 
times  seven  moons  for  your  coming,  and  has  held  this 
calm  over  the  sea  which  followed  the  destruction  of 
Par-sar-do-kep-piart  and  the  dancing  of  the  heavens,  so 
that  the  sea  water  became  stagnant;  but  now  the  monster 
is  gone  and  his  dead  body  you  will  see  no  more.  And 
because  the  way  of  the  whole  land  and  sea  is  clear  I 
must  depart  from  you  for  awhile ;  you  go  your  way  and 
after  which  let  your  kind  put  on  his  head  and  body  the 
covering  of  me  and  my  kind  ;  it  will  make  him  proud 
because  it  showeth  the  greatness  of  our  friendship. 
There  will  be  no  more  trouble  between  man  and  beast ; 
your  work  is  now  complete,  you  can  go  your  way  to 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  43 

your  children  who  need  your  teaching,"  and  May-May 
immediately  flew  away  towards  the  setting  of  the  sun. 
When  Klose-kur-beh  turned  the  bow  of  his  canoe  to 
ward  the  north  land  he  beheld  not  the  body  of  the 
serpent  on  the  surface  of  the  water,  but  instead  there 
was  a  beautiful  ripple  all  over  the  sea  caused  by  the 
gentle  breeze  from  the  direction  of  the  setting  sun,  to 
where  May-May  had  flown.  It  was  here,  when  Klose- 
kur-beh  for  the  first  time  felt  tired  ;  May-May  going 
away  made  him  feel  lonely  and  he  wanted  to  see  his 
own  people.  When  night  came  this  same  lonely 
feeling  was  still  upon  him,  he  prepared  a  place  for  a 
night's  rest.  After  the  darkness  had  come  and  before 
laying  down  to  sleep,  to  cheer  himself,  Klose-kur-beh 
did  sing.  When  this  was  done,  the  seven  trees  that 
stood  nearest  bent  their  tops  down  and  listened  to  the 
singing  of  Klose-kur-beh,  and  when  the  singing  was 
over,  the  largest  of  the  seven  straightened  its  body  up 
and  said,  "How  grateful  the  heart  of  man  ought  to  be 
when  he  can  bring  cheer  to  himself  by  singing  when 
lonely.  When  my  kind  and  I  sing,  we  sing  in  distress ; 
when  the  fury  of  the  winds  shake  our  limbs  we  sing  in 
wailing, — our  roots  are  many  and  strong  and  cannot 
move  to  avoid  the  fury  of  the  heavens.  We  stand  and 
wait  for  whatever  befall  us.  Because  you  can  move  at 
your  pleasure  do  not  linger  here,  but  on  the  morrow 
when  the  sun  rises  take  your  canoe,  and  with  your  com 
panion  go  forth  toward  the  sun,  heed  not  the  moving 
of  the  sun  during  the  day,  but  keep  that  same  course 
that  you  take  from  here  and  keep  it  seven  days  and 
seven  nights,  and  on  the  seventh,  when  the  sun  is 
highest,  you  will  come  to  a  swift  water  which  will  turn 


44  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED  MAN. 

your  canoe  toward  the  noon,  and  the  swift  water  will 
bear  you,  your  canoe  and  companion  very  fast  in 
the  direction  you  ought  to  go.  Seven  moons  you  will 
be  borne  that  way,  and  after  the  seven  moons  have 
passed  take  your  paddle  and  turn  the  bow  of  your 
canoe  toward  the  setting  sun  and  in  seven  days  from 
that  time  you  will  find  land  and  trees.  When  you  find 
land  it  will  be  like  this  land  and  the  trees  the  same  as 
we.  Your  work  will  then  be  complete  because  you 
shall  then  have  found  that  there  is  a  spirit  in  all  things, 
and  where  there  is  a  spirit  there  is  knowledge,  and 
where  there  is  knowledge  there  is  power,  and  as  there 
is  knowledge  in  us,  we,  the  seven  trees,  will  show  you 
the  power  that  is  in  us  and  will  smooth  the  way  for 
you  the  whole  time  of  your  journey.  When  you  reach 
the  swift  water  call  it  "Etto-chi-psi-tuk, — Gulf  Stream.' ' 
But  you  must  not  claim  it  for  your  convenience  alone, 
because  this  swift  water  was  made  for  the  convenience 
of  three  men, — one  red,  one  white  and  one  black  man. 
The  course  of  the  current  will  change  four  times  ;  when 
the  time  comes  that  either  of  these  three  men  wish  to 
use  it  will  change  its  course  to  suit  his  convenience, 
— a  course  for  the  red  man,  a  course  for  the  white  man 
and  one  for  the  black  man.  After  each  has  had  a  share 
it  will  return  then  to  the  same  course  as  you  will  find 
it  seven  days  hence.  On  the  morrow  when  you  depart 
from  here,  take  nothing  for  food  because  it  will  be 
brought  and  laid  before  you  each  day  by  your  faithful 
friends.  When  you  depart  on  the  morrow  put  a  mark 
on  me  so  that  you  may  know  me  when  you  return, 
because  from  here  you  must  return  to  your  people. 
When  you  reach  the  end  of  your  great  journey  on  the 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  45 

swift  water  and  have  found  land  and  trees,  turn  to  the 
north  land  which  will  bring  you  back  to  here,  and  from 
here  you  will  know  which  way  to  find  your  people." 
After  this  saying,  the  other  six  trees  bent  back  straight 
and  all  was  silent  and  Klose-kur-beh  went  to  sleep, 
When  the  morrow  came  and  when  the  first  dawn  broke 
forth  to  tell  that  the  sun  was  coming,  a  loud  barking 
of  an  animal  was  heard  coming  from  the  direction  of 
the  setting  sun.  Klose-kur-beh  answered  it  seven 
times,  when  the  animal  came  shaking  its  tail,  and  with 
ears  dropped  down  on  the  side  of  his  head,  and  having 
in  his  mouth  large  fragments  of  meat  which  he  laid  at 
the  feet  of  the  man,  arid  said,  "I  have  come  to  stay 
with  you,  I  shall  stay  where  and  when  you  stay, 
and  I  shall  go  when  and  where  you  go,  When  all  the 
animals  got  together  after  all  the  fear  had  passed  at  the 
destruction  of  "Par-sar-do-kep-pi-art,"  we  all  lay  down 
to  talk  about  your  good  heart  in  saving  us  from  such  awful 
destruction,  and  I  was  sent  to  be  your  companion. 
Knowing  that  after  all  trouble  will  have  passed  away, 
man's  feeling  shall  then  come  to  him  ;  there  shall  be  a 
time  for  him  to  weep,  and  a  time  for  him  to  laugh,  a 
time  to  be  happy  and  a  time  to  be  lonely,  but  in  time 
of  loneliness  you  will  have  a  great  comfort  in  me,  be 
cause  when  you  are  in  hunger  I  will  find  game  for  you 
to  kill  that  you  may  be  filled.  I  have  brought  this  as 
the  food  for  myself  because  before  I  started  we  all  of  us 
heard  the  trees  talk  with  you.  I  know  where  you  and 
I  are  going  this  day,  although  the  food  I  have  brought 
is  only  enough  for  a  little  while,  yet  it  will  last  during 
our  goings,  though  long  it  be.  And  as  there  is  a  spirit 
in  all  things,,  the  united  spirit  of  myself  and  those  that 


46  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

have  sent  me  will  have  power  in  this  matter.  I  fear 
not  hunger."  And  when  Klose-kur-beh  heard  this  his 
loneliness  left  him  and  he  said  to  the  animal,  "welcome 
Arl-moose," — dog,  Then  the  man  got  the  canoe  ready 
to  atart,  and  while  waiting  for  the  sun  to  rise  he  put  a 
mark  upon  the  tree,  chipping  off  the  bark  on  the  side 
toward  the  rising  sun,  while  the  Arl-moose  divided  the 
fragments  of  meat  of  the  "Ta-mar-queh — beaver,"  took 
the  liver  and  buried  it  deep  in  the  ground  in  front  of  the 
spot  on  the  tree,  saying,  "The  nature  of  me  and  my 
kind  will  help  us  much  in  finding  this  spot."  Then  the 
dog  took  the  other  meat  and  the  tail  of  the  beaver  and 
carried  it  forth  to  the  canoe  and  laid  it  therein  and 
carefully  covered  it  with  the  "Kus-kul-siarl, — sea 
weed." 

When  the  sun  arose  they  started  on  their  journey  in 
that  direction  and  kept  that  course  paying  no  attention 
to  the  moving  of  the  sun,  and  when  the  sun  was 
highest  May-May  came  to  them  with  a  load  of  food  and 
water  for  the  man  which  he  laid  before  him,  saying, 
"Eat  and  drink  and  be  filled,"  and  after  May-May  had 
departed  on  his  journey  back,  Klose-kur-beh  took  up 
the  food  and  called  it  "Pun-Nuk, — Ground  Nuts"  and 
did  eat  of  it,  and  drank  the  water  that  was  in  the 
vessel  which  he  called  "  Weeh-po-lark-sun-suk. — Pitcher 
plant,"  and  Klose-kur-beh  called  it  good.  On  the 
morrow  at  the  same  time  there  came  two  May-May's 
who  brought  food  and  water  for  the  man,  and  when 
the  third  day  came  three  May-May's  came,  and  brought 
the  same  kind  of  food,  and  on  the  fourth  day,  four 
May-May's  came  with  the  same,  but  this  time  two 
"Weeh-po-lark-sun-suk"  were  brought.  On  the  fifth 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN.  47 

day,  five  May-May's  came,  and  on  the  sixth,  six  May- 
May's  came,  and  on  the  seventh,  seven  came  which 
passed  the  canoe  and  made  a  circle,  so  that  their  coming 
to  the  canoe  was  from  the  direction  of  the  rising  sun, 
and  the  head  one  of  the  flock  said  to  the  man,  "This 
day  we  came  to  you  from  another  direction  because  it 
is  not  good  for  you  to  eat  one  kind  of  food  always. 
There  is  much  in  the  earth  which  is  good  for  man  to 
eat,  therefore  on  the  morrow  there  will  be  a  change 
made.  This  day  your  course  will  be  changed  toward 
your  right  hand  and  your  journey  will  be  toward  the 
noon,  and  in  that  direction  you  will  go  to  the  end  of 
time  which  the  trees  have  commanded  you."  After 
this  saying  the  May-Mays'  departed,  leaving  the  man 
to  eat  his  meal.  Klose-kur-beh  saw  that  each  time 
he  eat  his  meal  the  dog  also  ate  his,  but  would 
only  eat  about  half  of  the  beaver's  tail  and  laid  away 
the  other  part  for  the  next  meal,  and  would  cover 
it  up  carefully  each  time  with  the  sea  weed,  and  Klose- 
kur-beh  noticed  that  each  time  when  the  dog  uncovered 
his  food  it  was  whole,  the  same  as  it  was  before  he 
began  to  eat  of  it.  And  while  they  were  eating,  the 
canoe  reached  the  swift  water  which  immediately 
turned  it  toward  the  noon  and  bore  it  very  fast 
in  that  direction,  and  when  the  morrow  came,  when 
the  sun  was  highest,  the  seven  May-Mays  came  again 
bringing  to  the  man  a  different  kind  of  food  which  they 
laid  before  him,  and  immediately  flew  away.  Klose- 
kur-beh  saw  it  was  a  different  kind  of  food  which  was 
taken  from  under  the  ground,  and  he  called  it  "See- 
pun, — roots  of  the  red  lily,"  which  afterwards  became 
a  great  dish  among  the  children  of  the  red  man.  In 


48  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OP   THE  RED   MAN. 

drifting  along  in  this  swift  water  he  saw  seven  kinds  of 
fish  and  water  animals.  The  first  one  seen  he  called  "Ar- 
kiqu," — Seal,  the  next  was  the  "Poo-da-peh," — Whale; 
then  came  the  "Sur-bid-yar-maqu," — Grampus,  "See- 
gar-lur-dee," — Shark,  came  next,  "Choos-ka-ba-so, — ' 
Porpoise,  was  also  seen,  *'Noo-kar-mavu," — Codfish, 
came  next,  then  came  the  seventh  which  he  called 
"Mur-mur-lar-maqu," — Mackerel.  No  more  fish  were 
noticed  and  no  more  named,  and  on  each  day  his  food 
was  brought  to  him.  On  every  seventh  day  a  change 
of  food  was  brought,  there  being  only  three  vegetable 
kind,  the  rest  was  in  berries  and  fruit.  In  the  first 
part  of  his  southern  trip  berries  were  brought,  and  to 
ward  the  end  of  it,  fruit  and  plums,  and  at  the  very 
last  was  the  vegetable  again,  with  which  he  was  kept 
until  the  end  of  his  voyage.  The  berries  were 
"M'skik-wee-min-sark," — Strawberries,  then  the  "Sar- 
tarl," — Blueberries,  also  the  "Ka-pus-kee-mi-nuk,"- 
Raspberries,  and  uArs-paqu-sall," — Huckleberries, 
"Arspump-squa-mi-nal," — Gooseberries,  and  the  "Chi- 
loom-nal," — Grapes,  were  brought,  also  the  "Ar-do-ho- 
do-arl" — Bananas.  The  May-Mays  also  brought  "War- 
sar-wa-si-sall," — Oranges,  and  at  last  the  "Arp-cha-da- 
sarl," — Potatoes,  and  he  said,  "  As  this  kind  of  food  will 
be  the  most  common,  yet  the  principal  food  for  man,  we 
will  bring  no  other  kind  as  you  are  soon  to  reach  the 
land,  after  which  you  can  gather  your  own  food. 
When  the  allotted  time  for  sailing  had  passed,  when 
the  sun  was  highest,  the  May- Mays  came  with  the  same 
kind  of  food,  and  after  laying  the  same  before  the  man 
he  said,  "We  will  now  all  of  us  take  leave  and  bid 
adieu  to  the  swift  water,  arid  when  we  are  up  high  and 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN.  49 

have  taken  our  course,  you  and  your  companion  turn 
the  bow  of  your  canoe  toward  the  right  hand  and  follow 
us,  keep  that  same  course  until  you  reach  the  land.  As 
we  leave  the  swift  water,  we  must  first  show  our 
reverence  to  the  trees  for  their  goodness  in  keeping 
the  waters  quiet  during  your  long  voyage." 

Immediately  all  the  May-Mays  arose,  first  going  to 
ward  the  north  land,  then  turning  toward  the  right, 
toward  the  rising  sun,  then  to  the  noon,  and  again 
turning  to  the  right,  heading  to  the  direction  of  the 
setting  sun,  and  one  bird  sang  out,  "Pess-aqu, — one," 
which  caused  all  the  birds  to  turn  again  to  the  right 
and  fly  in  the  same  circle  as  before.  Again  the  leader 
counted,  saying  "Niss, — two,"  which  caused  them  to 
take  another  turn,  and  another  circle  was  made,  each 
time  going  higher,  and  when  the  counting  place  was 
reached  uNarss — three"  was  counted  and  another  circle 
was  made,  and  "Eaoo, — four,"  was  counted  and  every 
time  a  circle  was  made  a  count  was  taken  of  it,  "Nun, 
— five,"  Na-qua-ters, — six,"  "Tur-par-wurs, — seven," 
and  on  the  seventh  circle  the  birds  were  quite  high  in 
the  air,  and  continued  on  their  way  to  the  setting  sun. 

Klose-kur-beh  turned  his  canoe  to  the  right  and  fol 
lowed  the  May-Mays  which  soon  flew  out  of  his  sight. 
For  seven  days  he  kept  that  course — each  noon  his  food 
and  water  was  brought  to  him.  On  the  seventh  day 
when  the  sun  was  rising,  only  one  May-May  came  who 
after  laying  the  food  before  the  man  said,  "This  day  I 
have  done  all  my  work  for  your  sake  and  when  night 
comes,  you  will  rest  your  body  on  the  land  among  the 
trees,  and  because  the  trees  have  commanded  you  to  go 
forth  and  findj  the  living  water  which  the  Great 


50  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

Spirit  has  made  for  man's  convenience^  so  when  the 
night  comes  when  you  take  your  rest,  before  going 
to  sleep,  pour  all  the  water  that  is  still  remaining 
in  the  "Weeh-po-lark-sun-suk,"  around  the  roots  of 
the  largest  tree  seven  times ;  and  all  the  trees  will 
rejoice  because  this  will  be  your  thanksgiving  and 
you  will  have  given  all  that  you  have,  and  each  morn 
ing  when  you  have  risen,  go  on  your  way  toward  the 
north-land  and  find  your  people  ;  I  will  come  no  more  ; 
and  he  flew  away  leaving  the  man  and  dog  to  finish 
the  voyage.  Klose-kur-beh  watched  the  bird,  who 
flew  away  very  low  and  he  could  see  fishes  jump  up 
out  of  the  water  as  the  bird  was  flying  past,  but  May- 
May  flew  so  fast  no  fish  could  catch  him  ;  and  while  yet 
he  was  watching  the  bird  and  as  the  May-May  flew  out 
out  of  his  sight  he  saw  beyond,  the  dark  specks  of  the 
land  ;  and  when  night  came  he  was  on  it,  and  immediate 
ly  prepared  a  place  to  rest  for  the  night,  and  before 
going  to  sleep  did  pour  all  the  water  he  had  around 
the  roots  of  the  largest  tree  as  May-May  had  com 
manded. 

When  morning  came  the  dog  got  up  and  shook  him 
self  and  said  "I  have  eaten  the  last  of  my  food,  I  took 
it  while  you  were  in  your  sleep,  and  this  day  my  work 
for  your  sake  begins  ;  whatever  you  want  I  shall  find, 
but  you  must  prepare  it  to  your  own  liking — Give  me 
not  of  it,  but  give  me  the  crumbs,  that  is  my  portion." 
Straightway  the  dog  went  until  he  came  near  to  the 
edge  of  the  water  and  there  put  his  head  down  and 
began  to  dig  the  wet  earth  with  his  two  paws,  and 
soon  brought  out  of  it  a  shell  fish  and  brought  it  to 
the  man  and  laid  it  at  his  feet  saying,  "Take  and  eat, 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  51 

and  be  filled,"  and  Klose-kur-beh  did  break  the  shell 
and  did  eat  the  "Aiss" — Clam.  After  this  was  done 
the  two  started  on  their  journey  toward  the  north-land, 
keeping  their  course  very  near  the  land  along  the 
coast. 


CHAPTER  III. 

Klose-kur-beh's  hunting.— The  first  mother  changed  into  corn  and  tobacco. 

NOTHING  can  be  said  of  events  during  this  long 
northern  journey,  nor  the  exact  time  it  took  to  ac 
complish  it,  only  that  when  Klose-kur-beh  reached  his 
people  he  told  them  it  took  many  seven  times  seven 
moons  journey  from  the  time  he  turned  to  north  land 
to  find  them.  So  by  his  statement  that  the  swift  water 
must  have  carried  him  very  fast  southward.  He  also 
mentioned  having  found  the  different  kinds  of  food  the 
same  as  the  May-May  brought  to  him  while  on  his  jour 
ney  southward,  and  how  he  gathered  and  lived  on  the 
same  after  turning  northward.  One  incident  which  was 
brought  about  by  his  companion,  the  dog,  he  spoke  of 
with  much  emphasis,  and  described  it  minutely,  and 
designated  the  place,  and  told  the  people  he  had 
put  a  mark  on  the  spot  which  would  stand  as  long  as 
his  people  existed.  The  following  was  his  story,  "One 
day  when  we,  (meaning  himself  and  the  dog,)  had  ar 
rived  at  a  place  of  a  high  mountain  whose  slopes  run 
down  to  the  waters'  edge,  the  dog,  who  was  asleep  in 
the  canoe,  while  I  was  paddling,  got  up,  began  to 


52  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

breathe  hard,  putting  his  nose  up  in  the  air  as  if  to  catch 
the  freshness  of  it,  and  when  he  finally  turned  his  head 
toward  the  high  mountain,  in  which  position  he  held 
himself  for  a  long  while,  turned  to  me  and  said,  'Master, 
here  in  this  part  of  the  north  land  man  must  needs  have 
some  meat  to  eat  because  such  he  will  find  from  here 
north, — berries  and  fruit  are  good  in  their  season  and 
places,  but  the  time  is  coming  when  these  will  lose 
their  season ;  therefore  when  night  comes,  get  your 
bow  and  arrow  ready  for  using,  because  at  the  breaking 
of  day  to-morrow  I  will  go  up  on  the  high  mountain 
we  have  just  passed ; — there  is  now  feeding  on  the 
bark  of  the  mountain  trees,  moose,  whose  meat  is  good 
for  you  and  your  kind  and  me  and  my  kind,  the  virtue 
of  which  gives  strength  to  the  body  and  makes  the 
heart  glad  to  those  who  are  fortunate  enough  to  get  it, 
which  will  always  be  valued  highly  by  your  people 
because  it  can  be  saved  to  keep  many  days,  yea, 
many  moons.  On  the  morrow,  before  the  sun  is 
highest  I  will  drive  one  to  you  and  when  I  do  this, 
shoot  and  kill.  After  you  have  killed  the  animal  you 
shall  immediately  open  his  body  :  the  belly  you  shall 
open  with  your  stone  knife  and  the  intestines  you  shall 
give  me,  not  from  your  hand  to  my  mouth,  but  throw 
it  in  front  of  me,  because  this  is  my  portion  and  that 
will  be  the  way  you  will  give  it  me.  If  my  saying  is 
not  obeyed  I  will  lose  all  the  nature  of  my  kind.  If  I 
get  fat  on  the  best  part  of  the  animal  in  common  with 
you,  then  the  power  of  smelling  the  sweet  meat  of  the 
animal  will  be  taken  away  from  me,  so  beware  and 
give  me  what  belongs  to  me.'"  When  night  came  the 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  53 

two  companions  rested,  and  when  the  next  dawn  came 
the  man  awoke  from  his  sleep  and  upon  looking  around 
for  his  companion  found  him  not,  he  beheld  that  the 
dog's  bed  was  vacant ;  immediately  he  got  ready  his 
stone  knife,  bow  and  arrow,  and  in  a  little  while  he 
heard  the  barking  of  his  dog  on  the  mountain.  The 
sound  of  the  barking  indicated  that  the  dog  was  going 
toward  the  water,  and  in  another  moment  he  saw  the 
animal  swiftly  running  among  the  trees  and  bushes  and 
then  came  out  of  them  and  straightway  he  made  for 
the  water,  and  into  it  he  went.  When  he  reached  it 
he  began  to  swim  across  the  water  toward  the  other 
land,  and  the  dog  also  came  out,  but  instead  of  going 
into  the  water,  ran  on  the  shore,  passed  the  animal 
and  kept  on  his  way  until  he  reached  a  point  nearest 
the  other  land,  when  he  also  went  in,  and  swam  so 
fast  that  he  reached  it  before  the  animal  did ;  the  dog 
ran  along  the  shore  in  front  of  the  animal  and  would 
not  let  him  land,  and  when  the  man  saw  this  he  took, 
his  canoe  and  other  things,  went  forth  to  get  near  the 
animal  so  to  kill  it,  and  when  he  had  come  in  front  of 
it,  the  animal  saw  that  the  man  and  the  dog  had  reached 
the  shore  before  him,  turned  to  go  to  the  other  land; 
when  the  man  saw  what  the  animal  was  doing,  he 
followed  it  and  just  before  reaching  the  other  land  came 
upon  it  and  with  bow  and  arrow  did  slay  the  animal 
and  brought  the  body  out  of  the  water  on  to  the  land. 

Upon  looking  around  he  beheld  his  dog  afar  off  sit 
ting  on  a  point  of  land  waiting  for  his  portion.  So  in 
a  moment  more  he  did  cut  the  belly  of  the  animal  open 
with  a  sharp  stone  knife  and  took  out  the  contents  and 


54  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED   MAN. 

did  throw  the  intestines  to  his  dog  who  was  sitting 
afar  off — and  said  when  he  was  doing  this — "Let  this 
day  put  a  mark  on  the  place  of  my  doings." — After 
saying  this  he  went  to  work  to  cut  the  animal  and  took 
such  parts  as  he  needed  for  food.  He  did  take  the 
fore  part  and  left  the  other  part  for  a  mark,  so  that  his 
people  might  know  where  he  made  his  first  hunt  for 
the  large  animal.  Upon  doing  this  he  took  out  the 
"Oos-squon," — Liver,  and  laid  it  beside  the  animal's 
body,  and  then  called  the  other  part  "Oo-kar-chi," — 
Hind  part,  after  which  he  said,  "These  things  needs 
be  here  to  mark  my  works  and  it  shall  be  so,  and  the 
mark  shall  stand  as  long  as  my  people  exist ;  and 
immediately  that  part  of  the  animal  became  stone,  and 
the  intestines  also  left  a  mark  across  the  water  from 
one  shore  to  the  other  which  was  a  long  way.  Some 
parts  of  the  intestines  which  he  threw  at  his  dog, 
dropped  down  very  near  the  spot  where  the  body  of 
the  animal  lay  and  the  other  part  reached  near  where 
the  dog  was  sitting  so  that  the  whole  part  did  not 
break  or  disconnect  but  strung  along  the  whole  dis 
tance  which  can'  now  be  seen,  resembling  the  intestines 
of  an  animal,  with  its  white  fat  and  blood  on  the  ledges 
near  the  moose  body,  coming  out  at  where  the  dog  is — 
All  along  the  whole  distance  this  mark  can  now  be 
seen  ;  according  to  the  modern  measurments  and  reck 
oning  a  distance  of  seven  miles ;  these  intestines  lay 
along  the  bottom  of  the  sea  which  can  be  seen,  wherever 
the  water  is  shallow  enough  so  the  bottom  can  be  seen  ; 
they  lay  on  the  ledges  and  on  the  large  and  small  rocks 
the  whole  way.  When  Klose-kur-beh  had  put  the  fore 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  55 

part  of  the  moose  in  his  canoe  and  upon  looking  up  to 
see  the  dog  he  saw  there  were  three — seeing  this  he 
departed  immediately  toward  them,  but  upon  neanng 
the  spot  discovered  that  the  other  two  were  stone 
resembling  in  form,  two  dogs.  When  his  mistake 
became  known  to  him  he  marvelled  much  and  said, 
"This  is  very  strange.  But  man  must  take  warning 
that  in  all  his  works,  his  plans  must  needs,  at  times 
be  changed.  I  have  made  my  plan  to  have  my  dog  turn 
into  stone  and  leave  it  here  to  mark  the  place  with  the 
other  marks.  But  for  this  sudden  change  in  my  vision — 
taking  two  stones  for  two  dogs — making  three  dogs  in 
number  when  really  there  was  but  one,  causes  me  to  move 
with  more  caution.  Therefore  I  must  change  my  plan  so 
that  instead  of  letting  my  dog  turn  into  stone  to  mark 
this  place,  I  shall  let  the  two  stones  stand  for  a  mark 
and  they  shall  stand  during  the  pleasure  of  the  people 
whose  number  has  been  established  to  three.  So  he 
called  his  dog  into  the  canoe  and  resumed  his  journey. 
When  the  hour  came  to  prepare  for  a  meal  he  turned 
his  canoe  up  into  a  small  river,  but  finding  rapids  so 
great  he  concluded  not  to  ascend  further  than  to  the 
foot  of  the  rapids  with  the  canoe,  and  wishing  to  mark 
the  spot  where  he  first  cooked  his  meal  after  killing 
large  game  on  his  returning  journey,  took  out  some 
meat  and  carried  it  to  the  head  of  the  falls.  Not  hav 
ing  a  kettle  to  cook  his  meat  and  as  he  wished  to  cook 
the  meat  in  water  that  flowed  into  the  place  where  the 
game  was  killed,  he  selected  a  place  near  the  head  of 
the  falls  and  dug  out  a  place  in  the  solid  rock  with  his 
hands — a  hollow  place — so  it  held  water — he  then 


56  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED   MAN. 

made  a  vessel  out  of  birch  bark  with  which  he  carried 
water  from  the  river  to  fill  the  stone  kettle.  While  he 
was  absent  getting  the  water  the  dog  also  began  to  dig 
another  hole  in  the  ledge  with  its  paws.;  seeing  on  his 
return  what  the  dog  had  done,  caused  him  to  enquire 
of  the  dog  why  he  was  digging  the  hole  ?  The  dog 
replied  that  it  was  not  good  for  man  and  dog  to  eat  out 
of  the  same  dish.  At  this  Klose-kur-beh  said  "There 
will  be  no  need  for  man  and  dog  to  eat  out  of  the  same 
dish  because  you  have  already  established  a  form  in 
which  you  shall  receive  the  meat  from  the  hand  of  man. 
In  the  beginning  of  our  journey  north  you  declared  to 
me  that  when  meal  time  came  you  would  ask  for  the 
fragments  of  the  meal  be  cast  before  you.  Let 
this  be  the  rule  just  as  you  have  requested."  At 
this  the  dog  stopped  digging  and  laid  down  waiting  for 
the  fragment  from  the  man's  meal.  After  getting  all 
things  ready  for  cooking  and  having  placed  the  water 
and  meat  in  the  same  kettle,  Klose-kur-beh  took  two 
fragments  of  dead  and  dry  wood  and  facing  the  sun 
rubbed  the  two  sticks  together  until  a  blaze  came,  from 
which  he  made  a  large  fire  and  heated  stones  and  put  them 
into  the  kettle ;  and  the  water  did  boil  so  that  he  was 
able  to  cook  his  dinner.  After  eating  the  meal  the 
man  and  the  dog  returned  to  the  canoe  and  resumed 
their  journey,  leaving  the  two  stone  kettles  in  the 
ledge  as  a  mark  where  the  first  meal  was  cooked  after 
killing  the  first  large  game. 

Nothing  more  can  be  said  until  the  place  from  which 
the  two  started  was  reached,  the  morning  they  took 
their  southern  trip.  Upot  reaching  the"  place  Klose- 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED   MAN.  57 

kur-beh  was  almost  at  a  loss  to  find  the  exact  spot,  but 
the  dog  went  directly  to  the  spot  and  dug  up  the 
fragments  of  meat  that  he  had  buried  there  the  morn 
ing  they  started,  and  the  dog  did  eat  the  meat.  This 
ended  the  sea  journey. 

When  night  came  the  man  and  the  dog  slept  on  the 
same  ground  where  the  man  slept  previous  to  the  sea 
voyage  ;  and  early  on  the  morrow,  after  carefully  laying 
away  the  canoe  started  on  the  overland  journey  to  the 
man's  people  ;  the  dog  leading  the  way.  It  took  them 
only  seven  times  seven  suns  to  reach  the  people,  and 
when  it  was  known  that  Klose-kur-beh  had  returned, 
there  was  great  rejoicing,  and  as  the  news  spread  many 
came  from  afar  to  greet  him.  He  found  that  during 
his  absence  the  people  had  multiplied  very  much.  But 
he  had  no  difficulty  in  finding  No-ka-mi  in  the  extreme 
northern  part  of  the  land  inhabited  by  the  people. 

And  here  Klose-kur-beh  began  to  make  the  stone 
implements  for  his  people,  because  there  had  been  a 
division  ;  the  people  had  divided  themselves  into  clans. 

As  soon  as  the  news  of  the  return  of  Klose-kur-beh 
reached  the  ears  of  the  first  mother  of  the  people,  she 
became  very  much  agitated  and  her  action  gave  much 
alarm ;  nothing  seemed  to  give  her  relief,  and  she 
showed  a  discontented  mind  day  after  day.  She  was 
yet  fair,  and  it  seemed  that  in  all  those  years  which 
were  many,  since  she  became  the  mother  of  the  first 
child,  her  age  had  not  changed;  she  looked  much 
younger  than  many  of  her  off-springs,  and  the  husband 
retained  his  age  equally  as  well.  Both  being  yet 
young,  the  love  that  existed  between  them  was  great ; 


58  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED   MAN. 

so  when  the  man  saw  his  wife  in  such  a  discontented 
state  it  grieved  him  much.  He  used  every  means  to 
find  out  what  brought  such  a  discontent  to  his  wife, 
but  all  his  efforts  failed.  He  loved  his  wife  so  much 
he  thought  it  was  out  of  place  to  ask  her  any  questions 
so  concluded  to  wait  for  further  developments.  But 
his  waiting  was  all  in  vain ;  instead  of  the  contentment 
he  had  hoped  for,  the  discontentment  was  on  the  in 
crease  and  had  got  to  such  a  stage  that  the  wife  absented 
herself  from  his  presence  as  the  sun  neared  the  noon 
line  each  day,  and  remained  away  until  the  shadows 
would  be  far  toward  the  rising  sun.  Finally  it  had 
such  an  effect  upon  his  mind  that  he  lost  all  control  over 
his  patience,  which  soon  reduced  his  manhood  to  such 
an  extent  that  the  sense  of  honor  left  him,  and  he 
determined  to  watch  his  wife.  By  careful  watching 
for  a  long  time  he  discovered  the  direction  she  took  in 
going  and  would  return  the  same  way.  He  resolved 
to  make  further  discoveries,  so  one  day  just  before 
the  time  came  for  her  return,  he  went  and  hid  himself 
near  a  river  at  a  point  where  he  could  scan  its  banks 
for  a  long  distance.  His  patient  waiting  was  rewarded 
at  last  by  seeing  her  coming  to  the  opposite  bank, 
cheerfully  singing  as  she  entered  to  ford  the  river. 
While  her  feet  were  in  the  water  she  seemed  to  be  in  a 
very  happy  mood,  there  was  brightness  in  her  coun 
tenance,  and-  he  beheld  something  trailing  behind  her 
right  foot  which  appeared  like  a  long  green  blade. 
Upon  reaching  the  shore  she  stooped  down  and  with 
her  right  hand  picked  off  the  trail,  cast  it  into  the 
water  and  the  thing  floated  away.  As  soon  as  she  had 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  69 

cast  the  blade  from  her,  the  same  down  cast  look  spread 
over  her  fair  brow  and  with  that  look  she  went  her 
way  towards  home.  Soon  after  the  woman  had  gone, 
the  man  came  out  from  his  hiding  place  and  imme 
diately  began  to  search  for  the  trail  that  had  been  cast 
into  the  water  which  he  readily  found  lodged  among 
the  rocks  below.  Upon  examining  the  thing  it  proved 
to  be  a  long  green  blade  of  some  strange  plant,  the 
like  of  which  he  had  never  seen  before.  While  thus 
holding  the  blade  in  his  hands  a  sense  of  honor 
returned  to  him  and  immediately  he  put  the  blade  into 
the  water  and  only  gazed  upon  it  while  it  floated  away. 
Honor  and  patience  having  returned  unto  him  he  was 
ready  to  undergo  any  and  every  thing  if  only  he  could 
get  the  woman  to  tell  him  what  would  bring  happiness 
to  her.  He  resolved  to  gain  her  confidence  by  love, 
although  this  had  failed  in  times  past,  but  he  made  up 
his  mind  to  try  it  again,  and  in  that  frame  of  mind  he 
went  his  way,  following  his  wife.  Upon  reaching 
home  he  found  the  woman  in  the  same  down  cast  look. 
When  the  sun  was  going  down  he  called  her  to  come 
forth  to  see  the  beautiful  sun,  she  obeyed  and  came 
forth ;  side  by  side  they  stood  gazing  upon  the  sun 
that  was  going  down.  Immediately  seven  little  chil 
dren  came  and  stood  in  front  of  them  looking  into  the 
woman's  face  saying,  "We  are  in  hunger  and  the 
night  will  soon  come;  where  is  the  food?"  Upon 
hearing  this,  water  came  from  the  woman's  eyes  seven 
drops  came  and  dropped  upon  the  earth.  The  man 
reached  forth  his  right  hand  and  wiped  away  the 
tears  from  the  woman's  brow.  It  moved  him  so  much 


60  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN. 

that  his  hand  shook,  seeing  this  the  woman  said  to  the 
little  ones,  "hold  your  peace  little  ones,  in  seven 
moons  you  shall  be  filled  and  shall  hunger  no  more." 
With  glad  hearts  the  children  departed  and  were  seen 
no  more.  On  seeing  this  the  strong  man's  heart  was 
moved  and  immediately  he  asked  his  wife  if  she  would 
tell  him  what  he  could  do  to  make  her  happy.  She 
answered  and  said  that  if  he  would  show  love  to  her 
that  would  last  while  the  world  stands  she  would  then 
be  happy,  not  only  would  she  be  happy  but  the  whole 
world  be  happy.  The  man  answered  that  he  had 
shown  all  the  love  that  was  in  him  and  if  she  knew 
any  more  love  that  he  could  show  to  tell  him,  and  he 
would  show  it  in  a  manner  to  please  her.  She 
answered,  that  she  wanted  him  to  show  such  a  love 
that  all  the  people  might  also  love  her,  and  that  she 
wanted  a  love  that  would  last  always.  The  man  then 
said,  if  it  is  in  my  power  to  bring  this  about  it  shall 
be  done.  This  answer  brought  brightness  to  her  brow, 
then  turning  to  the  man  and  casting  her  eyes  fully 
upon  his,  said  with  happiness,  "My  eyes  can  meet 
yours,  and  before  the  sun  goes  down  seven  times,  it 
must  then  be  the  beginning  of  happiness  the  world 
over;  and  man,  if  you  are  ready  to  hear  my  request 
and  if  you  are  ready  to  grant  it,  I  will  now  make  it 
known."  The  man  answered  as  before*  say  ing,  "If  it  is 
in  my  power  your  request  shall  be  granted."  Then  the 
woman  turned  her  pleading  eyes  to  him  saying,  "Take 
the  stone  implement,  with  it  slay  me  unto  death,"  and 
the  man  said,  "This  is  beyond  my  power,  and  further  it 
is  only  the  beast  that  slays  mankind,  but  before  the  sun 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  61 

goes  down  seven  times  I  shall  answer  you."  And 
before  the  sun  arose  the  man  was  on  his  way  to  the 
north  land  to  consult  Klose-kur-beh  upon  the  matter, 
and  when  the  sun  was  rising  on  the  seventh  day  he 
returned. 

Klose-kur-beh  had  told  him  that  her  request  must  be 
granted,  because  she  came  to  the  world  for  good,  and 
that  none  could  be  realized  until  she  had  fulfilled  her 
mission.  When  this  was  made  known  to  her,  her  joy 
was  great,  and  she  gave  directions  as  to  what  should  be 
done.  She  told  the  man  after  he  had  slain  her,  to  get 
twisted  branches  of  the  small  trees  and  tie  the  branches 
around  her  neck  and  drag  her  body  to  a  large  open 
space  of  land  and  to  drag  it  all  over  the  open  space, 
and  when  the  flesh  was  worn  away  to  the  bones  turn  it 
and  wear  away  the  other  side,  and  after  he  had  dragged 
her  body  all  over  the  land  to  bury  her  bones  in  the 
middle  of  it  and  then  come  away,  and  in  seven  moons 
to  go  and  gather  all  he  found  on  the  land, — gather  and 
eat,  but  not  all  of  it — save  some  to  put  in  the  land 
again.  Let  seven  moons  pass  before  you  put  my  flesh 
in  the  ground  again  ;  put  it  under  the  ground  so  the 
birds  will  not  devour  it.  My  bones  you  can  not  eat, 
but  you  can  burn  it,  and  it  will  bring  peace  to  yon 
and  unto  your  children.  On  the  morrow  when  the  sun 
was  rising  the  man  did  slay  the  woman  and  he  dragged 
her  body  over  a  large  open  land  and  did  bury  her  bones 
in  the  center  of  it  as  directed.  The  man  did  not  visit 
the  place  until  after  the  seven  moons  had  passed,  but 
others  went  before  the  time  came  and  brought  from  the 
land  long  green  blades  of  the  plant  which  the  man  rec- 


62  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

ognized  as  the  same  kind  of  blade  that  he  saw  trailing 
behind  the  woman's  feet  when  fording  the  river.  When 
the  seven  moons  had  passed  the  man  went  to  the  place 
where  his  wife's  bones  lay  and  when  he  came  to  the 
place  he  beheld  the  place  filled  with  tall  plants  but  not 
green  because  the  sun  had  faded  them  to  a  yellow  shade, 
and  upon  examining  the  stock  found  substance  in  them 
which  he  tasted  and  it  was  sweet,  and  he  called  it 
"Skar-moo-nal" — Corn,  and  upon  reaching  the  place 
where  the  bones  lay  he  found  a  plant,  large,  with  broad 
leaves,  without  substance  ;  because  it  was  bitter  in  taste 
he  called  it  "Ootar-Mur-wa-yeh." — Tobacco.  Upon 
his  return  to  the  people  and  made  known  what  he  had 
found  there  was  great  rejoicing  among  them  and  all 
went  to  help  the  man  in  the  harvest ;  all  the  corn  and 
tobacco  were  properly  taken  care  of.  And  here  corn 
and  tobacco  raising  began. 

The  man  whose  heart  had  been  so  heavy  with  sorrow 
since  slaying  his  wife,  began  to  be  cheerful  when  see 
ing  such  a  general  rejoicing  and  happiness  so  universal. 
He  began  to  see  that  granting  the  request  of  his  wife 
was  for  the  good  of  all,  and  he  no  longer  lay  sorrow  to 
his  heart.  The  only  perplexity  to  him  was  how  to 
dispose  of  the  fruits  of  the  great  event.  He  saw  tbnt 
something  must  be  done  and  that  in  the  future  some 
wholesome  management  would  be  needed.  As  he  was 
not  able  to  come  to  a  just  conclusion  of  it,  he  called 
together  seven  young  maidens  and  sent  them  to  the 
north  part  of  the  country  to  get  Klose-kur-beh  to 
come  among  them  and  tell  them  what  to  do  with  the 
harvest,  which  was  then  in  the  peoples  hands.  When 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  63 

the  seven  maidens  came  forth  he  charged  them  with  the 
mission  and  on  the  morrow,  at  the  rising  of  the  sun, 
the  young  maidens  did  start  on  their  journey  saying 
that  the  seven  times  seventh  sun  would  bring  them 
back  and  when  the  shadows  began  to  appear  toward 
the  setting  of  the  sun,  gather  themselves  together 
and  await  their  coming.  And  when  the  time  arrived, 
which  was  appointed  by  the  young  maidens,  all  the 
people  gathered  to  welcome  them  home,  and  when  the 
sun  began  to  cast  its  shadows  toward  the  setting  of  the 
sun  the  maidens  appeared  and  said,  Klose-kur-beh  wilP 
come  immediately."  When  the  sun  was  highest, 
Klose-kur-beh  came  and  immediately  the  people  began 
to  show  him  the  harvest.  Upon  seeing  the  great 
store  before  him  Klose-kur-beh  showed  signs  of 
joy  and  said,  "There  was  one  thing  the  Great  Spirit 
did  not  mention  to  me,  therefore  we  must  be  careful  in 
our  minds  what  we  do  with  it.  And  because  this  has 
come  from  the  good  of  a  woman's  heart  1  must  first 
give  thanks  to  the  Great  Spirit  in  the  name  of  the 
seven  young  maidens  who  brought  the  message  to  me ; 
and  immediately  he  went  back  to  the  spot  where  he 
first  came  that  noon,  and  looking  up  to  the  sun  did 
give  thanks  to  the  Great  Spirit,  seven  times — once  for 
each  maiden,  and  then  he  began  to  speak  to  the  people, 
saying  :  The  first  words  of  the  first  mother,  have  come  to 
pass.  When  she  first  came  she  claimed  her  origin 
from  the  beautiful  blade  of  the  plant  and  that  her 
power  shall  be  great  and  it  shall  be  felt  all  over  the 
world  ;  that  she  was  all  love, — even  the  beast  will 
steal  her  body — for  the  love  of  it.  And  now  that  she 


64  LIFE    AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED   MAN. 

has  gone  into  the  substance,  which  every  living  being 
will  love  we  must  take  care  that  the  second  seed  of 
the  first  mother  be  always  with  you,  because  this  is 
her  flesh.  When  you  are  filled  with  it,  it  gives 
strength ;  her  bones  also  have  been  left  behind  for 
your  good.  These  also  are  the  blades  of  the  plant. 
This  blade  will  not  give  strength  to  the  body,  but  will 
give  strength  to  the  mind ;  burn  it  and  inhale  the 
smoke  it  will  bring  freshness  to  the  mind  and  your 
heart  will  be  contented  while  the  smoke  of  it  be  in  you. 
These  two  things  must  always  bring  memory  to  your 
minds,  when  you  eat  remember  her,  and  do  the  same 
when  the  smoke  of  her  bones  rises  before  you  ;  yea 
more,  whatever  your  work  be,  stop  in  your  labor  until 
the  smoke  has  all  gone  to  the  Great  Spirit.  And  as 
we  are  all  brothers,  divide  among  you  the  flesh  and 
bone  of  the  first  mother,  and  let  all  shares  be  alike, 
then  the  love  of  your  first  mother  will  have  been  fully 
carried  out. 

A  little  more  I  wish  to  say  for  your  good.  By  the 
change  made  in  your  first  mother,  other  changes  in  the 
world  shall  follow.  There  shall  be  weeping  and  shed 
ding  of  tears,  and  there  shall  be  rejoicing  causing  the 
body  to  move  to  suit  the  joy.  There  shall  be  a  season 
to  put  the  seed  in  the  ground,  and  a  season  for  it  to 
grow  and  then  the  harvest  shall  come.  There  shall  be 
a  season  for  heat  and  a  season  for  cold,  so  prepare 
yourself  for  all  these,  that  when  each  one  comes  you 
may  be  ready  for  it.  The.  end  of  my  mission  among 
you  has  now  come.  I  shall  leave  you  and  shall  hearken 
no  more  to  your  calling,  but  shall  wait  the  calling  of 


LIFE   AND  TRADITIONS  OP.THE  RED  MAN.  65 

the  Great  Spirit.  Strange  things  shall  happen,  but 
those  who  bring  about  the  changes  will  tell  you  all  about 
them  so  you  may  understand  them.  Here  Klose-kur-beh 
took  leave  of  his  people  to  come  no  more.  Nothing 
cast  such  a  glopm  over  the  whole  country,  as  did  the 
departure  of  Klose-kur-beh.  The  first  tears  were  then 
shed  among  the  older  women.  The  men  were  silent 
for  a  long  time,  and  after  a  long  continued  silence  the 
old  men  began  to  strive  to  cheer  up  the  younger.  The 
cause  of  their  gloom  was,  that  Klose-kur-beh  did  not 
recommend  any  system  of  organization  under  which 
the  people  might  live. 

For  seven  suns  the  people  wandered  aimlessly  about 
each  day.  They  questioned  one  another  as  to  what  was 
best  to  do.  Finally  it  was  decided  that  the  seven 
young  maidens — the  same  who  had  previously  been 
sent  after  Klose-kur-beh,  be  called  forth  and  point  out 
some  method  which  if  good,  be  considered  by  the  old 
men  for  adoption.  Immediately  the  young  maidens 
were  called  forth  and  the  call  was  obeyed  and  the  young 
maidens  did  make  their  appearance  and  entered  the 
gathering  of  the  people  which  was  very  great. 

The  eldest  of  the  maidens  led  the  way,  followed  by 
the  others  in  single  file.  Upon  entering  the  gathering 
they  all  put  up  their  hands  over  their  eyes  to  hide  them 
when  a  halt  was  made  and  the  leader  of  the  maidens 
then  spoke  these  words  :  "In  purity  we  seven  have  lived, 
and  in  chastity  must  we  point  out  to  you  the  way  we 
must  all  live.  First,  we  want  the  first  Father  to  be 
called  forth  so  he  may  stand  in  front  of  us."  When 
the  first  Father  had  been  called  and  was  standing  in 


66  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

front  of  the  young  maidens,  the  leader  continued  her  say 
ing,  calling  the  man  "Na-mi-ter-qui" — Father,  you  have 
chosen  us  again  to  help  you.  In  purity  we  seven  have 
lived,  yet  we  are  not  worthy  to  gaze  upon  your  brow 
on  this  so  important  an  occasion,  therefore  we  have 
covered  our  eyes.  Our  eyes  being  covered  we  cannot 
see  what  is  around  us,  yet  we  can  see  with  our  hidden 
eyes  the  way  which  will  be  good  for  your  children. 

First,  you  shall  call  forth  the  first  born  seven  men, 
and  with  them  you  shall  hold  council  upon  all  matters 
and  the  way  the  people  shall  live.  Teach  them  to 
hearken  unto  the  older  men.  This  will  be  good,  because 
the  more  a  man  sees  the  more  he  knows,  and  a  man  can 
learn  more  in  two  days  than  in  one  day.  Therefore 
heed  your  elders.  Be  very  careful  and  have  all  this 
done  in  seven  moons,  and  in  seven  times  seven  moons 
all  our  sayings  will  have  been  learned,  then  happiness  will 
come.  Then  the  seven  maidens  bowed  seven  bows  to  the 
Father  and  departed.  All  the  people  were  well  pleased 
with  the  sayings  of  the  young  maidens  and  immediately 
they  began  to  look  upon  the  Father  for  advice  upon  all 
matters,  and  in  seven  moons,  the  seven  first  born  men 
had  been  consulted  and  the  council  meeting  of  the  Red 
man  began. 

After  these  regulations  had  been  established,  seven 
young  men  were  sent  to  cary  the  news  to  Klose-kur- 
beh,  and  on  the  morrow  at  the  rising  of  the  sun,  the 
young  men  did  start  to  carry  the  news  as  directed. 
The  young  men  returned  saying  Klose-kur-beh  could  not 
be  found.  His  home  was  standing  on  the  same  ground, 
but  no  person  in  it,  and  no  one  answered  their  call. 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  G7 

The  house  was  not  empty,  it  is  filled  with  the  imple 
ments  of  stone,  the  number  being  so  great  that  they 
will  last  our  people  many  times  seventy  years.  At 
this  saying  the  younger  class  of  men  showed  more 
signs  of  disappointment  than  the  older  ones.  They 
said  Klose-kur-beh  had  acted  strangely  to  leave  the 
land  without  giving  the  power  which  he  had  to  shave 
out  the  implements  of  stone.  At  this  the  Father  spoke 
to  the  young  men  saying  that  Klose-kur-beh  had  not 
made  a  positive  promise.  He  remembered  hearing  him 
say  "that  the  power  would  be  given  unto  them  bye  and 
bye,"  therefore  it  will  be  good  for  us  to  hold  our  peace, 
and  bye  and  bye  the  power  will  be  given  unto  us.  At 
this  the  young  people  held  their  peace,  and  the  Father 
and  the  seven  men  gave  directions  what  to  be  done  with 
the  implements.  They  made  them  last  a  long  time,  or 
until  the  power  to  make  more  was  given  to  the  people. 
Before  many  seven  moons  had  passed  the  younger 
people  began  to  be  very  much  discontented  because 
there  was  none  among  them  who  had  the  power  not 
only  to  shave  out  stone  with  wood,  but  likewise  there 
was  no  one  that  was  able  to  talk  with  the  animals, 
trees,  birds  and  fishes  like  Klose-kur-beh,  and  they 
began  to  appeal  to  the  Father  and  the  seven  men  to 
bring  a  change  so  that  they  might  have  some  kind  of 
power,  and  they  pressed  their  appeal  so  forcibly  that 
the  old  men  were  very  much  perplexed. 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

The  winter  and  the  seven  years  famine  —The  discovery  of  tjie  first  white 
man's  track. 

Just  at  this  period,  a  boy  came  one  morning  when 
the  sun  was  rising  and  entered  the  house  of  a  man  and 
wife  who  had  only  one  child,  a  son.  The  boy  who 
came,  was  a  strange  one,  none  could  'tell  to  what  family 
he  belonged.  Upon  entering  the  house  of  sticks  and 
leaves  he  selected  a  place  for  himself  beside  the  boy 
of  the  house,  who  was  about  the  same  age  and  size  as 
himself.  Upon  being  questioned  whence  he  came  and 
whose  son  he  was ;  and  how  long  since  he  was  born  ? 
answered  and  said,  he  was  the  frost,  the  son  of  the  air, 
and  that  he  was  many  times  seven  years  old.  At  this 
saying,  the  man  of  the  house  said:  "Boy  I  do  not 
understand  your  saying.  I  do  not  know  the  frost, 
neither  do  I  know  the  time  seven  years ;  yet  I  know 
there  is  a  Spirit  in  the  air."  The  boy  answered  and 
said,  "If  you  know  that  there  is  a  Spirit  in  the  air, 
very  well,  but  the  frost  you  shall  know  after  the 
harvest  has  passed,  after  that  the  time  shall  be  divided 
into  twelve  moons,  and  as  has  been  established  with 
you,  and  you  are  many — your  moons  shall  be  seven, 
and  because  I  am  one  my  moons  shall  be  five.  In  a 
little  while  I  shall  leave  you  and  shall  talk  with  you 
no  more. — Yet  you  shall  see  me  every  year  after  your 
seven  moons  shall  have  passed."  And  the  man  of 
the  house  saw  that  the  boy  was  not  only  a  stranger, 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  69 

but  that  he  had  a  strange  mind — a  mind  not  the  same 
as  the  children  of  the  people — and  without  further  say 
ing  he  let  the  boy  remain  with  the  boy  of  the  house 
and  share  his  home ;  he  took  care  of  him  in  the  same 
manner  as  he  did  his  own  son,  but  he  saw  that  the 
strange  boy  di  dnot  grow  in  size  like  his  own  son.  He 
began  to  bring  his  mind  to  the  saying  of  the  boy. 
And  the  change  he  noticed  was  that, — there  could  be 
seen,  birds  in  large  numbers  all  going  toward  the  noon 
when  the  seven  moons  had  passed — After  five  moons 
the  birds  would  return. s  Few  birds  remained  all  the 
time  and  these  were  birds  that  could  fly  but  a  short 
distance.  He  also  found  at  this  time  that  some  of  the 
fresh  water  animals*  built  houses  beside  the  rivers  and 
that  they  would  stay  in  them  five  moons.  The  larger 
animals  sought  caves  wherein  they  could  stay  during 
the  passing  of  the  five  moons.  No  other  change  could 
he  see  did  these  events  bring  about.  But  when  the 
seven  years  had  passed,  there  was  a  great  commotion 
among  the  people,  more  so  among  the  mothers'  of 
little  children,  because  a  child  had  been  found  dead  in 
its  bed,  and  none  knew  the  cause  of  it ;  no  mark  of 
violence  could  be  found  upon  the  body,  fhat  could 
have  caused  death,  only  that  its  mouth  was  filled  with 
blood.  This  visitation  caused  great  excitement 
because  it  was  the  first  death  that  have  come  among 
them.  No  death  ever  occured  only  when  some  one 
was  killed  and  devoured  by  the  animals.  People  came 
from  afar  off  to  see  the  dead  child.  The  old  men  were 
called  together  to  give  their  opinion,  but  none  were 
able  to  solve  the  mystery.  The  first  Father  and  the 


70  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

seven  men  were  called  upon  to  direct  how  to  dispose  of 
the  dead  body.  The  men  gave  directions  '*  that  the 
body  be  buried  deep  in  the  ground  saying,  if  it  be 
laid  away  for  keeping,  animals  would  -come  and  devour 
it,  and  if  put  into  the  water  the  fishes  would  do  the 
same.  This  saying  brought  peace  in  all  minds  and  the 
dead  body  was  buried  deep.  The  man  that  had  charge 
of  the  strange  boy,  noticed  that  the  child  acted  very 
strangely,  during  the  day,  he  showed  signs  of  being 
sleepy  and  fell  asleep  during  the  day,  a  thing  he  never 
did  before.  This  caused  the  man  to  have  a  suspicion 
of  the  boy  as  being  the  one  which  caused  the  death  of 
the  child.  So  when  night  came,  the  man  lay  awake 
watching  the  movements  of  the  boy,  and  during  his 
watching  he  did  not  see  the  boy  go  out,  but  when  the 
night  had  been  half  gone  the  boy  came  in  from  out  side 
and  immediately  began  to  spread  the  coals  of  the  fire 
which  had  not  gone  out,  and  after  spreading  the  coals 
with  the  fire-stick,  took  out  some  substance  from  his 
bosom  and  carefully  laid  it  on  the  coals ;  and  after  it 
had  been  cooked  took  it  off  and  began  to  eat.  At  this 
moment  the  man  arose  and  asked  the  boy  what  he  was 
doing?  and  the  boy  answered  and  said  he  was  eating, 
and  the  man  asked  him  what  he  was  eating,  to  which 
the  boy  answered,  "I  am  only  eating  this  small  tongue 
of  a  child"  at  the  same  time  offering  the  man  a  piece  to 
eat,  which  the  man  refused  to  touch,  and  after  eating, 
the  boy  went  to  bed  and  was  soon  in  a  deep  sleep. 

And  when  the  morrow  came,  when  the  sun  was 
rising,  another  excitement  came  and  it  was  greater  than 
the  first,  because  another  child  had  died  the  same  way 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  71 

as  the  first,  and  in  a  very  short  time  the  gathering  of 
the ,  people  was  great,  because  those  who  had  come 
from  afar  to  see  the  first  child  were  yet  in  the  place. 

When  the  man  of  the  house  saw  how  large  the 
gathering  was,  and  while  the  strange  boy  was  yet 
asleep,  he  went  forth  and  told  the  people  that  it  was 
the  work  of  the  strange  boy.  After  the  man  had  told 
what  he  had  seen  the  boy  do,  he  told  the  people  to 
go  and  examine  the  dead  child's  mouth, "and  if  they 
found  his  tongue  gone,  surely  it  was  the  boy's  work 
whom  he  had  seen  cooked  and  eaten  it. 

Upon  examining  the  dead  body  it  was  found  that  its 
tongue  was  gone,  nothing  in  the  mouth  but  blood.  It 
was  evident  who  committed  the  awful  deed,  and 
immediately  "not  only  the  seven"  but  all  of  the  old 
men  were  called  together  to  consult  as  to  what  should 
be  done.  While  yet  it  was  early  in  the  day  a  decision 
had  been  reached  and  rendered  to  the  effect,  that  the 
boy  be  immediately  slain  by  the  father  of  the  one  whose 
death  the  strange  boy  had  caused  first — and  the  second 
bereaved  father  shall  help  the  first  in  binding  the  body 
of  the  slain  with  cords  of  strong  bark,  and  fasten  rocks 
to  the  body  so  it  will  sink,  and  put  it  into  deep  water 
where  no  eye  can  reach  it  that  it  be  devoured  by  the 
fish.  The  two  bereaved  fathers  after  slaying  the  boy 
did  cast  its  body  into  the  deep  water. 

And  when  night  came,  before  the  first  half  had 
passed,  while  yet  the  fire  in  the  house  burning  brightly, 
the  same  boy  came  in  trembling,  and  seeing  the  man 
yet  awake  said,  "I  am  cold"  and  he  began  to  warm 
himself.  After  warming  himself  awhile,  he  took  the 


72  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

fire  stick  and  began  to  spread  the  coals,  and  he  took 
from  his  bosom  two  tongues  which  he  cooked  as  before, 
and  after  eating  them  went  to  sleep  as  usual.  Early  on 
the  following  morning  the  loud  voices  of  men  were 
heard,  and  immediately  two  men  rushed  into  the  house 
where  the  boy  lay  asleep,  and  the  two  men  'aroused 
him  from  his  slumber,  and  charged  the  boy  with  the 
death  of  their  two  children.  Seeing  this  the  man  of 
the  house  told  the  men  to  hold  their  peace  until  the  old 
men  had  met  whose  directions  the  people  must  follow. 
Hearing  this,  the  two  men  departed  in  great  anger, 
leaving  the  boy  to  sleep  again. 

Early  in  the  day  the  old  men  met,  and  directed  the 
second  bereaved  father  to  slay  the  boy  in  the  presence 
of  all  the  people,  and  the  last  bereaved  fathers  to  burn 
the  body  to  ashes,  after  which  the  four  bereaved 
mothers  shall  cast  the  ashes  to  the  four  winds.  The 
first  to  cast  the  ashes  to  the  rising  of  the  sun,  the 
second  bereaved  to  the  setting  of  the  sun,  the  third  to 
the  noon,  and  the  fourth  towards  the  north  land. 

While  yet  the  boy  was  in  his  sleep  the  four  men  went 
forth  and  took  the  boy  from  his  bed  and  carried  him  to 
a  high  land  where  the  people  had  already  gathered, 
and  the  men  slew  the  boy,  and  the  other  two  fathers 
burnt  up  the  body  to  ashes,  and  the  four  mothers  cast 
the  ashes  to  the  four  winds. 

When  the  night  came,  and  before  the  man  of  the 
house  had  retired  to  rest,  and  while  yet  the  woman  was 
up,  the  slain  boy  came  in,  his  face  flushed  with  anger, 
and  immediately  he  began  to  cook  three  tongues  in  the 
fire,  which  he  devoured  ravenously,  after  which  he 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED  MAN.  73 

threw  his  body  violently  on  the  bed  and  immediately 
went  to  sleep,  while  the  woman  wrung  her  hands  wail 
ing  with  a  loud  moan.  Just  after  the  first  half  of  the 
night  had  passed,  it  was  discovered  that  three  children 
had  died  in  the  same  way  as  the  other  four,  and  imme 
diately  there  arose  loud  screeches  of  the  mothers  whose 
children  laid  dead  in*  their  homes,  and  also  the  tramping 
of  many  feet  following  the  mothers  who  were  running 
aimlessly  about  as  if  crazed,  and  the  husbands  of  the 
mothers  rushed  to  the  house  where  the  boy  was  sleep 
ing  to  take  him  by  force,  but  the  man  of  the  house 
advised  them  to  leave  the  matter  with  the  old  men,  but 
the  fathers  would  not  be  quieted  until  the  woman  of 
the  house  spoke  unto  them  saying,  "Hold  your  peace 
men,  until  after  the  coming  of  the  light  of  day,  when 
all  the  mothers  shall  have  been  awakened.  As  1  am  a 
mother  of  a  child,  I  know  the  value  and  the  amount  of 
love  a  mother  holds  for  her  child;  therefore  let  the 
mothers  have  a  voice  in  the  matter  that  this  cruelty 
may  be  stopped,  after  which  we  may  live  in  peace  and 
bring  peace  to  our  little  ones."  Hearing  this  the 
angry  fathers  departed  in  silence  while  yet  a  great 
uproar  being  heard  in  every  direction,  which  was  kept 
up  until  the  coming  of  the  day.  And  when  the  sun 
arose  the  great  noise  went  down  and  quietness  reigned 
until  the  sun  began  to  throw  its  shadows  toward  the 
setting  sun  and  the  se.ven  first-born  men  got  together. 
They  sent  for  all  the  men  women  and  children  to 
assemble  and  find  a  way  for  the  safety  of  the  children. 
In  this  assemblage  it  was  thought  best  to  pursue 
peaceful  measures ;  and  a  large  collection  of  valuables 


74  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED   MAN. 

were  got  and  put  into  the  hands  of  the  seven  bereaved 
mothers,  to  be  presented  to  the  strange  boy,  with  an 
earnest  appeal  to  him  to  cease  causing  the  death  of 
children. 

The  seven  mothers  went  and  laid  valuables  consisting 
of  some  fine  clothing  of  fur,  the  best  of  the  stone 
implements,  hooks  and  lines,  a  nice  bow  and  arrow, 
also  a  nice  canoe  before  the  boy,  begging  him  to  desist 
from  further  destruction  of  the  children.  When  the 
boy  saw  what  was  being  done  by  the  mothers  he  was 
very  much  moved,  and  said  he  was  sorry  for  what  he 
had  done.  Yet  it  was  done  for  the  people's  good  ;  upon 
speaking  further  he  said,  I  have  come  among  you  when 
I  was  many  times  seven  years  old,  and  I  have  been 
among  you  seven  years,  and  in  all  these  years  no  notice 
has  been  taken  of  me,  and  to  call  your  minds  to  me  I 
have  been  obliged  to  awaken  you  by  striking  a  blow 
where  it  will  be  most  felt.  Knowing  that  the  mother's 
heart  is  all  to  her  babe,  and  toward  that  babe  all 
tenderness  must  be  shown,  so  by  striking  down  the 
babe,  the  mother's  spirit  is  quickly  awakened,  and  soon 
she  wished  to  know  the  way  to  save  her  other  children. 

I  did  not.  come  for  your  valuable  goods,  take  them 
back  to  your  homes  and  divide  them  among  yourselves, 
because  I  will  hearken  unto  your  prayers  without  them, 
and  I  shall  grant  all  your  requests.  But  you  must  also 
tell  your  people  that  I  have  requests  which  I  ask  them 
to  grant.  First,  they  must  forget  my  works  or  what  I 
have  done  in  the  past,  because  what  I  did  was  necessary 
for  me  to  do.  I  did  this  to  show  you  how  cruel  I  will 
be,  if  you  do  not  prepare  yourselves  to  meet  me  when 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED  MAN.  75 

I  come  in  my  true  state  and  nature.  You  have  been 
born  and  lived.  No  death  has  come  since  the  world 
began,  only  when  a  beast  slays  you.  But  after  my 
coming  in  my  true  state  and  nature,  death  by  sickness 
will  come  upon  you,  because  when  I  come  you  shall 
call  me  "Pa-poon,"  winter.  If  you  are  not  prepared  to 
keep  your  body  warm  with  clothing,  you  shall  be  found 
dead  with  cold ;  but  if  you  are  not  dead,  you  shall  be 
taken  sick  and  die,  I  shall  have  pity  upon  no  one,  as 
as  there  is  no  pity  in  me,  I  have  shown  it  to  you 
in  taking  the  lives  of  your  seven  little  ones.  So 
prepare  yourselves  in  everything  for  the  five  moons 
which  I  claim. 

As  sickness  must  come,  I  have  brought  medicine  for 
all  kinds  of  sickness,  which  I  shall  leave  with  you. 
Now  I  want  you  to  grant  this  request.  Before  giving 
you  the  medicine  for  sickness,  I  want  to  have  a  rest,  I 
want  seven  young  maidens  to  attend  me  during  my  rest, 
each  maiden  shall  attend  me  one  year,  or  what  you 
call  twelve  "moons"  and  at  the  end  of  seven  years,  all 
the  seven  maidens  will  come  together  and  turn  my 
body  so  I  may  lay  on  the  other  side  of  my  body  for 
another  seven  years.  In  turning  my  body  in  the  first 
seven  years,  you  shall  find  where  my  body  laid,  seven 
sprouts  of  plants  starting  from  the  ground ;  let  them 
grow  seven  moons,  when  the  young  maidens  shall 
name  what  disease  each  plant  shall  cure ;  then  they 
shall  gather  the  seed  from  them  and  shall  scatter  it  to 
the  four  winds,  as  you  did  my  ashes,  and  the  seed  shall 
grow  all  over  the  land,  and  it  will  be  the  medicine  for 
the  sick.  After  this  is  done  the  young  maidens  shall 


76  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OP  THE   RED   MAN. 

have  finished  their  part.  Then  the  duty  of  the  young 
men  shall  begin.  While  I  was  with  my  father,  the  air, 
I  heard  the  wailing  of  your  young  men  because  no 
power  have  been  given  them  to  shave  out  implements 
from  the  stone ;  I  have  come  to  give  that  as  well  as 
medicine  for  sickness.  But  first,  when  the  young 
maidens  have  finished  their  work,  a  seven  times  seven 
young  men  who  having  no  wives,  shall  attend  me, 
seven  shall  attend  me  one  year,  then  another  seven  for 
another  year,  and  such  change  shall  take  place  among 
them  every  year  until  the  seven  years  have  ended ; 
There  must  be  one  awake  from  among  them  all  the 
time ;  if  at  any  time  ail  go  asleep  and  none  to  watch 
me  I  shall  arise  and  leave  them,  and  all  that  I  am  to 
give  shall  be  lost. 

But  if  they  heed  my  saying  and  watch  faithfully,  when 
the  end  of  the  seven  years  have  come,  all  of  the  seven  times 
seven  shall  assemble  in  my  presence  and  shall  stay  with  me 
the  last  seven  times  seven  nights  and  days,  who  shall  go 
fasting  and  shall  eat  once  in  every  seven  days  and  nights. 
But  none  shall  go  asleep  during  the  passing  of  the  seven 
times  seven  nights  and  days.  There  shall  be  no  power 
given  to  those  that  are  found  asleep  at  the  end  of  that 
time. 

As  I  have  come  to  do  good  I  shall  ask  nothing  only  what  the 
young  men  can  d.o,  therefore  I  say  that  when  the  time  comes 
for  the  seven  young  men's  turn  to  watch,  all  may  go  asleep 
but  one,  whose  eyes  shall  be  on  me  one  day  and  one  night, 
when  another  takes  his  place  for  the  next  night  and  day. 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN.  77 

Once  in  seven  days  and  nights  the  young  man  shall  take 
his  turn  in  watching  over  me. 

As  I  have  come  to  bring  medicine  to  you  which  you  shall 
give  to  those  who  shall  become  sick,  I  also  bring  death,  and 
those  that  are  too  much  exposed  to  my  nature  shall  die.. 

After  the  young  maidens  have  finished  their  work  and  the 
young  men  have  commenced  on  their  part,  the  spirit  in  me 
shall  become  changed,  because  I  am  to  give  the  spiritual 
power,  therefore  none  shall  touch  my  body ;  and  one  heeds 
not  my  warning  and  touches  me  shall  drop  and  die. 

And  as  I  have  been  distructive  to  your  children,  and  that 
same  destructive  power  still  remain  in  me,  you  must  be  very 
careful  in  keeping  the  little  ones  away  from  the  range  of  my 
eyes,  because  when  a  little  one  comes  within  seven  times 
seven  paces  and  my  eyes  fall  fully  on  them  they  shall  fall 
and  die.  And  for  your  safety  and  your  childrens  safety  I 
shall  now  take  out  all  the  bones  of  my  body  leaving  only 
enough  in  me  so  that  when  the  two  seven  years  have  ended 
I  can  take  them  back  into  my  body,  also  there  may  be  some 
thing  come  that  will  require  the  use  of  what  have  been  left 
in  me.  But  be  very  careful  in  putting  away  beyond  my 
reach  those  bones  I  have  been  taking  out,  because  if  you 
leave  them  near  me  I  will  reach  forth  and  put  back  all  you 
have  put  away  and  shall  be  able  to  depart  without  you 
knowing  and  not  receive  the  good  I  am  to  give.  In  taking 
the  bones  out  of  my  body,  will  show  you  two  things  ;  First, 
that  when  there  are  no  bones  in  the  body  it  will  not  be  able 
to  move.  The  second  thing  shown,  will  be  the  greatness  of 
the  power  in  the  air. 


78  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.          * 

It  is  the  air  that  have  sent  me,  because  I  am  the 
son  of  the  air,  and  before  I  leave  you,  you  shall  have 
been  given  the  greatest  power  the  man  will  ever  have, 
and  on  the  last  day  I  will  give  the  young  men  all  the 
instruction  how  to  use  and  how  to  retain  it."  Having 
ended  his  saying,  the  boy  reached  forth  his  right  hand 
and  began  to  take  the  bones  out  of  his  right  foot  and 
leg,  then  out  of  the  left  foot  and  leg,  hand  and  arm, 
also  the  ribs  on  both  sides  of  the  body  leaving  only  the 
back-bone  and  the  bones  of  the  head,  also  the  right 
hand  and  arm.  And  the  seven  maidens  who  had 
already  been  selected,  did  put  away  the  bones  out  of 
his  reach,  and  then  laid  the  body  on  its  left  side  where 
it  is  to  lay,  and  did  lay,  to  the  end  of  the  seven  years. 
After  the  boy's  body  had  been  laid  in  its  proper  place 
he  said, ''After  this  you  shall  call  me  "No-chi-gar-neh" — 
bone  handler."  And  the  faithful  maidens  did  their  duty 
to  the  satisfaction  of  the  boy  and  to  the  joy  of  the  old 
people. 

Having  performed  all  the  duties  required  of  them,  the 
young  maidens  wenl^  through  the  task  of  turning  the 
body  of  No-chi-gar-neh,  and  in  doing  so  did  see  the  seven 
plants  coming  through  the  ground  in  the  place  where 
the  boy's  body  had  been  laying  which  they  left  to 
grow.  And  when  the  seven  moons  have  passed  and 
after  gathering  the  seed  and  having  named  each  plant 
and  what  disease  they  will  cure,  did  cast  the  seed  in 
the  four  winds,  which  ended  the  works  of  the  seven 
maidens. 

And  after  the  maidens  had  departed  the  seven  times 
seven  young  men  took  their  turn  in  the  watching. 
They  asked  the  old  men  to  divide  them  into  sevens,  and 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  79 

to  select  the  first  seven  who  are  to  do  the  caring 
and  watching  the  first  year,  and  also  those  who  shall  do 
that  duty  the  next  year.  And  the  old  men  did  divide 
them  into  sevens  and  assigned  each  their  year  of  duty. 
When  the  first  seven  began  on  their  task  they  found 
No-chi-gar-neh  restless  and  breathing  heavy,  but  dare 
not  touch  his  body  because  they  had  been  forbidden 
to  do  so.  But  when  the  first  seven  days  have  passed, 
he  became  more  quiet  so  that  he  closed  his  eyes  and 
begun  to  gaze  steadily  out  in  the  open  space  in  front  of 
the  house.  And  it  happened  at  that  moment  a  child 
crossed  the  space  in  the  range  of  his  gaze  immediately 
fell  dead.  And  the  old  men  went  to  him  and  told  him 
what  had  happened,  the  news  of  which  moved  him 
very  much,  and  he  said  to  them,  "I  have  warned  you 
of  this,  but  children  will  be  children,  therefore  some 
thing  must  be  done  and  for  the  sake  of  the  little  ones, 
before  the  sun  goes  down  I  shall  close  my  eyes,  but 
first  all  the  seven  times  seven  young  men  shall  get 
together  so  they  be  present  and  see  it  done."  And 
after  the  young  men  had  assembled  No-chi-gar-neh 
lifted  up  his  right  hand  to  his  eyelids  and  drew  them 
one  by  one  down  to  the  lower  part  of  his  face  where 
they  remained  in  the  position  as  they  had  been  drawn. 
After  this  had  been  done  he  said,  "There  will  be  no 
more  trouble  with  the  little  ones,"  bade  the  young  men 
to  depart  in  peace,  which  the  young  men  obeyed 
leaving  only  those  who  were  on  duty  to  remain.  No 
more  trouble  took  place  so  that  a  good  care  could  be 
given  to  No-chi-gar-neh. 

When  the  allotted  time  had  arrived  all  the  young 
men  assembled  to  watch  and  to  fast  in  the  seven  times 


80  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED   MAN. 

seven  days  and  nights.  This  proved  an  arduous  duty  to 
perform  ;  so  much  so  that  when  the  end  of  time  had  come 
only  seven  were  found  awake,  the  rest  having  gone  to 
sleep.  And  when  No-chi-gar-neh  was  told  that  only 
seven  of  the  young  men  were  awake  and  the  rest  were 
in  sleep,  he  said.  "Seven  is  a  true  number,  I  am  glad  in 
my  heart  that  the  nature  has  made  a  good  selection, 
therefore  let  all  the  seven  times  seven  young  men  have 
seven  days'  and  seven  nights'  rest,  and  on  the  seventh 
day  send  back  to  me  the  seven  young  men  that  are 
now  awake.  Let  no  others  come,  and  when  all  the 
young  men  have  gone  home  to  rest,  let  the  seven  old 
men  come  before  me  because  .  I  have  much  to  say 
concerning  the  people.  Let  the  seven  young  men  who 
are  not  in  sleep  wake  those  that  are  in  sleep  so  that 
they  may  all  go  their  way,  for  I  have  nothing  to  say  to 
the  ones  that  are  in  sleep,"  And  as  soon  as  No-chi-gar- 
neh  finished  his  talk  the  seven  young  men  did  wake  all 
those  that  were  in  sleep  and  all  went  their  way,  each  one 
to  his  home. 

And  when  the  sun  was  in  the  noon  the  old  men 
entered  the  house  where  No-chi-gar-neh  was  laying, 
and  after  he  was  told  that  the  old  men  had  come  he 
said  to  them,  "Only  seven  days  and  seven  nights  longer 
I  am  to  be  with  you  in  the  same  flesh  as  your  flesh,  as 
after  that  time  has  passed  I  will  come  in  a  different 
substance  once  in  every  seven  moons  and  you  will  not 
see  me  as  you  do  now,  you  shall  only  feel  the  presence 
of  my  spirit,  a  spirit  which  will  not  give  comfort  to  you 
nor  to  your  children,  and  this  shall  be  so  while  the 
world  stands.  Because  in  happiness  you  came  into  the 
world,  but  in  sorrow  you  shall  live  in  it,  for  I  shall 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  81 

bring  sorrow  unto  those  that  are  not  prepared  for  my 
coming  because  when  I  begin  to  come  you  shall  reckon 
your  time  by  years  as  there  shall  be  winters  and 
summers." 

Here  No-chi-gar-neh  commanded  the  oldest  man  to 
tell  him  when  his  right  hand  was  toward  the  noon  sun, 
as  he  could  not  see  because  his  eyelids  were  drawn 
down.  He  lifted  up  his  right  hand  in  a  circular 
manner,  and  when  it  was  toward  the  sun,  the  old  man 
told  him  it  was  toward  the  sun. 

There,  he  said :  My  hand  now  points  to  the  sun ; 
The  sun  is  the  summer.  When  he  comes  near  I  will 
go  away,  for  he  will  have  no  pity  for  me,  he  will  melt 
my  white  robe  in  which  I  come  and  I  shall  go  away 
without  it,  but  I  shall  return  with  another  the  next 
year. 

When  the  seven  days  rest  had  ended  and  the  seven 
young  men  having  returned  to  him,  he  said  to  them, 
let  no  man  be  near  me  and  you  when  the  sun  is  down, 
because  when  night  has  come  you  will  know  no  one, 
you  will  be  restless,  yet  you  will  not  know  it  because 
you  will  be  in  a  trance  ready  to  receive  the  spiritual 
power  I  am  going  to  bring  upon  you ;  be  not  afraid 
nothing  will  befall  you  while  in  that  state. 

By  the  order  of  nature  I  was  in  the  trance  while  the 
first  seven  days  and  nights  was  passing,  yet  I  am  here 
ready  to  set  back  my  bones,  and  after  that  and  while 
you  will  be  in  the  trance,  I  will  draw  back  my  eyelids 
to  where  they  belong,  and  I  will  then  be  ready  to  do 
my  work.  In  bringing  the  spiritual  power  upon  you, 
ask  no  question  for  I  will  answer  none.  My  work  to 


82  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

me  is  plain.  But  although  you  will  have  the  power 
that  others  do  not  possess,  yet  it  will  be  always  a 
mystery  to  you  how  it  comes  to  those  that  possess  it, 
because  none  is  awake  when  the  Spirit  enters,  it  enters 
while  the  person  sleeps  ;  therefore  the  spirit  of  sleep 
will  tell  you  what  to  do.  There  will  be  many  who  are 
filled  with  the  false  spirit,  but  the  spirit  that  is  coming 
to  you  will  be  the  true  one,  and  it  will  only  go  from 
you  to  your  children,  none  others  will  be  able  to  get  it 
because  none  were  awake  when  the  time  came  to 
receive  it. 

I  will  take  you  up  far  above  the  ground  where  the  cur 
rent  of  the  air  is  pure,  and  in  the  midst  of  the  spiritual 
body  of  the  air,  and  where  the  current  conveys  the 
spirit  of  the  air  from  all  quarters  of  the  land,  there  you 
shall  be  filled  with  the  spirit.  And  after  being  filled 
you  shall  have  the  power  so  you  shall  be  able  to  shave 
out  stone  to  any  shape  and  form  you  want  with  the 
fragments  of  the  wood  from  the  tree  that  has  been 
shattered  by  the  ball  of  fire  that  shot  from  the  clouds. 
You  shall  also  have  the  power  so  you  can  turn  your 
selves  into  anything  you  \\ish  that  has  the  spirit  in  it; 
you  will  be  able  to  travel  in  the  air,  in  the  water  and 
under  the  water ;  you  shall  be  able  to  talk  with  not 
only  the  spirit  of  the  animals,  but  with  the  animals 
themselves.  Birds  and  fishes  you  shall  talk  with. 
Your  power  shall  be  according  to  the  amount  of  your 
faith ;  he  that  believes  in  the  spirit  shall  be  filled  with 
the  spirit,  and  his  power  shall  be  great ;  and  he  that 
believes  not  in  the  spirit  shall  have  power  only  accord 
ing  to  the  strength  of  his  body.  All  of  you  shall  be 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN.  83 

filled  with  the  spirit  before  the  sun  rises  again  ;  and 
being  filled,  your  power  shall  be  great,  yet  you  shall  not 
have  the  power  to  give  it  to  another  because  such 
power  shall  come  to  those  only  who  are  chosen  by  the 
spirit  of  the  air. 

Having  been  chosen  by  your  fathers  to  be  among  the 
seven  times  seven,  and  moreover,  having  been  selected 
by  the  spirit  of  the  air  to  be  the  seven  who  shall 
receive  this  great  power,  it  is  proper  for  me  to  say  that 
when  the  next  sun  shines  on  your  faces  you  shall  be 
great  men  among  your  people,  because  your  works  shall 
bring  great  comfort  to  yourselves  also  to  all  your  people, 
for  you  shall  be  useful  to  them.  Having  no  power  to 
give  to  others  the  same  as  you  possess,  yet  you  shall  be 
able  to  take  the  strength  away  from  your  brother  who 
shall  remain  weak  for  a  while.  This  power  shall  come 
to  you  to  show  how  much  the  spirit  of  the  air  is  able  to 
do  for  a  man,  so  that  all  may  believe  in  the  spirit  and 
in  you. 

Being  great,  great  must  be  your  care  in  keeping 
yourselves  in  this  greatness.  You  must  never  allow 
yourselves  to  become  so  small  as  to  use  your  power  up 
on  or  against  your  brother  on  any  contention.  Do  not 
abuse  one  another  with  this  power. 

uWhen  you  have  so  far  forgotten  my  saying  and 
begin  to  use  this  power  against  your  brother,  then  the 
time  is  near  when  it  shall  depart  from  you,  because 
whoever  abuses  this  power  shall  lose  it.  Oh,  would 
that  your  minds  be  equal  to  the  great  lesson  which  this 
mysterious  power  and  privilege  will  enforce  upon  them 
you  would  become  a  great  people,  because  all  the  arts 


84  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED   MAN. 

man  must  have  are  embodied  in  these  many  mysterious 
powers  which  are  good  food  for  study  ;  therefore  should 
you  let  them  pass  by  unobserved,  then  misfortune  will 
follow,  because  you  will  have  lost  all  the  power  and 
arts  it  would  have  produced  and  it  shall  never  return, 
because  all  shall  return  to  the  spirit  of  the  air.  Above 
all  things,  you  seven  that  the  power  be  given  must 
never  abuse  one  another  with  it,  and  you  must  teach 
those  who  will  be  fortunate  enough  to  get  the  same 
power  never  to  abuse  it.  Teach  them  also  never  to 
abuse  the  spirit  of  the  animals.  You  may  kill  the 
animal  and  eat  his  flesh  but  never  abuse  the  spirit  of 
it,  because  if  you  do  abuse  the  spirit  of  the  animal  he 
will  never  come  to  your  calling.  In  calling  to  you  the 
spirit  of  any  thing,  you  shall  not  call  it  into  your  house 
with  your  family,  but  you  shall  build  one  for  the  pur 
pose  which  must  be  made  strong  because  many  will 
come  in  a  rough  manner  and  shake  the  house  for  each 
shall  want  to  show  man  the  power  the  spirit  has. 

Now  that  the  time  has  come  and  the  people  are  in 
their  sleep,  I  will  call  forth  the  oldest  of  your  seven  to 
come  to  me  now.  And  when  the  young  man  obeyed 
and  had  advanced  to  the  side  of  the  boy  ;  the  boy  said, 
now  all  may  arise  and  listen  to  my  words ;  to  which  all 
the  young  men  obeyed  and  when  standing  by  his  side, 
he  said  to  them,  my  bones  are  with  us  but  are  laying 
beyond  my  reach,  twice  seven  years  have  they  been 
laying  where  your  people  have  placed  them,  and  as  I 
have  no  more  work  to  do  for  you  as  the  spirit  of  the 
air  will  this  night  do  its  own  work. 

As  I  am  the  son  of  that  spirit,  when  you  bring  my 
bones  the  touch  of  them  will  have  much  effect  upon 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED  MAN.  85 

you,  it  will  so  effect  you,  you  will  know  no  one  and 
you  will  not  know  one  another,  you  will  have  no 
thought  nor  feeling,  yet  you  will  all  realize  what  is 
passing  around  you  daring  the  coming  of  the  spirit. 
Up  high  in  the  air  you  shall  receive  it.  And  after  the 
spirit  have  come  in  you,  you  shall  see  many  things 
which  others  who  are  without  this  spirit  do  not  see. 

The  things  you  will  see  you  will  never  forget.  The 
time  surely  has  now  come,  and  only  a  few  more  words 
then  all  shall  be  done.  For  fear  the  people  may  doubt 
my  works,  it  will  be  necessary  for  you  to  show  them  the 
power  you  get  this  night,  so  when  you  have  come  down 
from  the  air  each  one  of  you  shall  go  to  your  home,  and  on 
the  morrow  when  the  sun  is  highest  you  shall  all  meet 
on  a  high  ground  and  there  build  a  house  the  entrance 
of  which  shall  be  low,  so  that  you  creep  like  the  babe 
in  entering  it ;  but  the  top  shall  be  made  open.  The 
house  shall  be  low  but  very  strong.  Seven  days  you 
shall  be  in  building  it,  and  on  the  seventh  day  at  noon 
all  of  you  shall  enter  and  close  the  door  so  that  no  other 
shall  enter  with  you.  After  this  is  done,  one  of  you, 
he  that  entered  first  shall  sing,  and  in  his  singing  shall 
call  the  spirit  of  every  living  thing,  and  the  different 
spirits  will  come  to  the  call.  And  after  you  have 
talked  with  them  they  shall  all  depart,  and  you  shall 
then  come  out  of  the  house  and  take  it  all  apart  so  it 
shall  not  stand  there  to  be  put  to  other  use.  After 
you  have  gone  through  all  this,  you  shall  then  have 
done  your  part  and  shall  go  home  to  stay.  You  the 
eldest  of  the  seven,  go  forth  and  bring  to  me  the  bones 
of  my  left  arm,  and  the  others  bring  the  other  bones. 


86  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

And  the  eldest  obeyed  and  brought  forth  the  bones  No- 
chi-gar-neh  called  for. 

Upon  laying  his  hand  on  the  bones,  the  young  man 
began  to  tremble  and  shook  violently  so  that  he 
went  into  a  trance,  and  when  the  others  laid  their 
hands  on  the  bones  to  bring  to  the  boy  it  effected  them 
the  same  way.  Thus  the  seven  were  in  a  trance  and 
did  not  realize  the  presence  of  each  other.  Yet  each 
one  had  a  vision  ;  the  memory  of  which  lasted  during 
all  their  lives.  All  did  realize  that  they  were  high  up 
in  the  air  so  that  they  could  see  the  whole  world  and 
the  face  of  it,  could  see  all  that  was  moving  and  could 
hear  all  the  sounds  of  the  world  as  the  face  of  the 
earth  was  like  the  smooth  ice  so  that  nothing  was  hid 
from  their  eyes.  But  upon  looking  in  the  direction 
where  the  sun  rises  there  was  a  thick  vapor  standing 
in  the  middle  of  the  ocean  beyond  which  they  could 
see  nothing,  yet  they  could  hear  sounds  like  those 
made  by  man.  And  upon  looking  around  they  saw 
that  No-chi-gar-neh  was  not  with  them,  he  had  departed 
to  come  no  more.  And  they  began  to  come  down, — 
and  soon  were  all  on  the  earth,  and  when  the  sun  arose 
all  went  their  way  each  one  to  his  home. 

And  when  the  noon  came,  the  seven  did  meet  on  a 
high  ground  as  commanded  by  No-chi-gar-neh,  and  did 
build  the  house  as  they  had  been  directed  ;  and  when  it 
was  built  and  ready  to  be  entered,  all  the  people  came 
to  witness  the  calling  of  the  spirits  ;  many  came  from 
afar  off,  so  that  a  very  large  crowd  of  people  surrounded 
the  house,  but  none  were  allowed  to  enter  with  the 
spiritual  men.  And  after  closing  the  door,  and  when 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED   MAN.  87 

the  singing  begun,  the  house  shook,  and  when  a  spirit 
arrived  the  whole  people  could  hear  its  arrival  because 
it  shook  the  house  violently,  and  the  people  did  hear  all 
what  the  spirits  said  to  the  men  in  the  house,  but  could 
see  nothing  come  nor  anything  depart.  After  the 
spiritual  conferences  had  ended,  and  the  spiritual  men 
got  out,  they  did  take  the  house  all  down  and  apart,  and 
each  one  was  allowed  to  rest  from  all  social  intercourse 
for  seven  days,  and  after  the  seven  days  had  passed  the 
old  men  began  to  visit  them  separately  to  learn  from 
them  all  they  saw  while  being  filled  with  the  spirit. 
This  the  young  men  found  to  require  a  long  time  to 
accomplish  as  the  old  men  were  obliged  to  go  through 
the  examination  by  making  inquiries  of  them  separately 
and  then  compare  the  reports  from  them  so  that  all 
things  be  learned  as  in  one  mind. 

After  this  was  done,  then  the  old  men  began  to  teach  all  the 
people  what  had  been  done  and  what  the  people  ought  to  do. 
The  first  change  that  could  be  seen  to  take  place  after  the 
people  had  witnessed  what  had  been  transpiring,  was  that 
many  of  them  were  taken  the  idea  of  singing.  First,  after 
the  manner  as  in  calling  the  spirit,  but  after  a  long  while 
they  sung  all  kind  of  ways,  each  singer  composed  its  own 
music,  but  when  one  composed  music  that  suited  the  people 
it  would  be  learned  and  sung  by  many  other  singers.  No 
written  music  was  ever  gotten  up,  neither  were  the  words 
ever  composed  for  any  music,  therefore  there  were  no  songs 
with  words  which  the  people  could  learn  and  sing.  True, 
there  were  in  some  instances  words  repeated  in  the  singing, 
but  never  more  than  four  or  five  words,  only  enough  to 


88  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED   MAN. 

indicate  what  prompted  the  singer  to  sing.  The  next  change 
and  the  most  remarkable  one  that  followed,  was  the  idea  of 
reckoning  of  time  from  the  moons  to  years. 

This  the  people  looked  upon  as  most  important  because 
in  seven  years  the  winter  was  to  come  and  it  seemed  that 
the  people  were  almost  at  a  loss,  hardly  a  score  of  them 
could  agree  upon  any  given  time.  At  all  events,  the  seven 
years  waiting  was  a  long  one,  and  many  changes  came 
before  the  winter  made  its  appearance.  When  the  old  men 
began  to  teach  the  young,  it  was  necessary  for  them  to  reckon 
the  time  in  their  teaching  by  the  generations,  because  every 
old  generation  must  teach  the  younger,  of  things  that  have 


After  getting  ready  for  the  winter  many  times,  but  it 
came  not,  the  people  were  much  puzzled,  and  in  their  per 
plexity  their  minds  were  very  much  diversified  in  the  matter  of 
reckoning.  Some  claimed  that  seventy  times  seven  moons 
had  passed,  while  others  say  seven  hundred  have  gone  by ; 
some  say  only  seven  years,  while  the  old  teachers  claimed 
that  seven  generations  have  come  since  No-chi-gar-neh  left 
them.  The  reckoning  of  the  teachers  had  more  weight 
among  the  people  than  the  others  on  account  of  the 
increased  state  of  the  population  since  No-chi-gar-neh  went 
away.  But  the  old  teachers  themselves  were  very  much 
bewildered  because  the  winter  had  not  come ;  and  having 
been  so  much  said  about  it,  the  attention  of  the  young 
people  was  called  to  it,  and  after  the  young  people  had 
much  talk,  reminded  the  old  folks  of  their  teaching.  They 
said  that  they  had  been  taught  that  when  winter  was  near 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OP  THE   RED   MAN.  89 

all  plants  shall  be  changed  from  green  colors  to  grey  and 
the  leaves  fall  off  the  trees.  This  reminder  of  the  young 
folks  opened  the  eyes  of  the  old,  so  nothing  more  was  said 
or  done  only  to  watch  the  appearance  of  the  plants  and 
leaves. 

In  about  seven  moons  the  whole  land  began  to  change  ; — 
air  cold,  cold  winds  began  to  blow,  and  nights  chilly,  and 
finally  frost  and  ice  was  found  in  places  some  mornings. 
Birds  began  to  gather  in  flocks  and  flew  away  toward  the 
noon.  At  last  the  snow  began  to  fall  which  covered  the 
whole  land,  and  the  old  men  called  it  "Pa-poon,"  winter. 
There  has  been  so  much  said  about  the  coming  of  winter, 
and  the  people  were  so  well  prepared  for  it,  none  perished  by 
the  cold,  but  many  made  sick  by  undergoing  the  long 
exposure,  but  these  were  soon  made  comfortable  by  the 
mothers  who  took  care  the  medicinal  plants  that  had  been 
gathered  by  the  maidens  previous  to  the  changing  of  the 
color  of  the  plants.  The  gathering  of  the  medicinal  plants 
and  putting  them  in  the  care  of  the  mothers  made  the  people 
look  upon  them  as  the  healers  of  the  sick,  who  when  called 
upon  went  to  their  work  with  willing  hands,  so  that  when  the 
winter  had  rolled  by  only  seven  deaths  were  reported,  while 
seven  times  that  many  had  been  relieved.  Thus  having 
conducted  the  medical  department  so  faithfully  and  well,  the 
duty  of  dealing  out  medicine  fell  to  the  women,  therefore 
there  was  no  man  doctor  among  them.  This  arrangement 
continued  until  after  the  coming  of  the  white  man.  To  deal 
out  medicine  to  the  sick  was  looked  upon  as  below  the  sphere 
of  man  ;  surgical  profession  was  not  known  and  the  practice 


90  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  TIED  MAN. 

of  surgery  was  not  needed,  because  those  who  dealt  out 
medicine  were  able  to  heal  all  kinds  of  diseases,  bones  and 
flesh  were  healed  alike.  Men's  minds  were  entirely  absorbed 
in  the  art  of  spiritual  works.  A  good  hunter  was  also 
considered  useful,  more  so  when  the  country  became  more 
thickly  populated. 

But  the  spiritual  men  were  considered  indispensible  beings. 
No  matter  how  great  a  hunter  a  man  may  be,  he  is  bound  to 
consult  these  men  upon  all  occassions,  therefore  the  services 
of  them  were  constantly  sought  after  and  were  always  busy. 

The  people  having  multiplied  to  such  an  extent  that  about 
all  of  the  stone  implements  made  by  Klose-kur-beh  had  been 
divided  up  amomg  them,  and  when  more  were  needed  the 
spiritual  men  were  called  upon  to  make  them. 

When  winter  came  and  the  snow  got  deep,  the  hunters 
were  sore  with  trouble  not  knowing  how  to  get  around  to 
their  hunting  in  such  a  deep  snow. 

One  day  some  boys  came  out  to  play  in  the  snow  and  in 
their  sports  made  themselves  some  foot  wear,  out  of  some 
bended  branches  of  trees  which  they  filled  the  middle  part 
with  the  strips  of  bark  of  the  "Wicki-bi- mi-si,"  Bass  wood, 
having  filled  the  middle  part  and  had  fastened  the  shoes  to 
their  feet  was  able  to  travel  about  on  top  of  the  snow.  The 
old  men  seeing  this  done,  the  idea  of  making  snow  shoes  soon 
prevailed  all  over  the  country,  and  as  the  use  of  them  gave  so 
much  satisfaction  that  the  filling  of  them  was  considered  too 
weak,  and  a  more  substantial  substance  was  sought,  and  strips 
of  green  hide  was  applied  to  satisfaction,  and  this  substitute 
in  place  of  Wicki-bi-mi-si,  having  been  put  into  them,  the 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OP   THE   RED    MAN.  91 

old   men   called   them  "Unk-mock," — snow  shoes.     Having 

invented  the  snow  shoes,  the  hunters  were  able  to  travel  the 

• 

country  at  will,  seeking  game.  The  game  was  so  plentiful 
the  people  did  not  suffer  much  in  want  of  it.  There  was 
such  a  supply  of  game  meat  with  the  corn  that  was  saved  in 
the  harvest,  made  the  people  happy  during  the  winter. 
These  winters  came  regularly  just  as  No-chi-gar-neh  had  told 
them,  so  preparations  were  always  made  to  meet  them.  As 
the  winters  came  one  after  another,  the  people  got  more  used 
to  them  and  the  death  roll  became  less,  that  is  according  to 
the  population.  Therefore  the  people  increased  in  numbers 
very  much. 

The  people  were  contented  and  lived  like  so  many  brothers, 
everything  seemed  to  be  within  their  reach,  a  want  was  not 
known  among  them  until  after  many  times  seventy  generations 
had  come,  when  a  spirit  of  May-May  came  to  a  noted 
spiritual  man.  The  May-May  came  to  tell  the  man 
of  the  seven  years  of  plenty  to  be  followed  by  a  seven  years 
of  famine,  which  will  bring  much  suffering,  because  there 
shall  come  snow  and  hail  which  will  cover  all  the  land  in 
great  depths,  and  the  May-May  warn  them  to  prepare  for 
the  coming  event. 

Knowing  that  the  May-May  had  proved  himself  to  be  a 
true  friend  to  man  in  the  beginning  of  the  world,  the  people 
were  ready  to  heed  his  warning.  Corn  was  planted, 
harvested  and  stored  in  the  log  cribs,  more  than  ever 
before  and  guarded  against  waste,  until  the  seven  years  of 
plenty  had  passed  when  the  seven  years  of  famine  was 
expected  to  begin. 


92  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN. 

None  knew  how  it  was  to  come,  but  when  the  summer  had 
passed  and  winter  came,  it  came  in  a  fury,  the  snow  fell 
in  great  depths  which  continued  for  seven  days  when  a  heavy 
hail  storm  followed  for  the  same  length  of  time,  and  then  on 
the  top  of  these  came  a  cold  rain  which  lasted  seven  more 
days,  then  came  the  severe  cold  seven  moons  which  froze  the 
wet  snow  and  hail  solid  like  the  rock,  the  old  men  called  it 
"Po-quar-mi,"  — ice. 

The  description  of  the  condition  of  the  people  during  the 
coming  of  the  ice  on  the  earth  never  has  been  told  to  the 
traditional  story  tellers,  therefore  this  part  will  have  to  be 
omitted.  This  much  however  was  gathered ;  that  after  the 
big  storm  and  when  the  severe  and  intense  cold  had  lasted 
seven  moons  with  no  signs  of  melting,  all  hopes  of  seeing 
the  summer  to  return  was  abandoned,  and  the  planting  of 
corn  likely  to  be  dispensed  with  for  the  next  seven  years, 
also  the  outlook  for  the  yearly  harvest  of  "Pun-nuk, "--ground 
nuts,  or  the  wild  potatoes,  so  disappointing  that  the  people 
began  to  look  forward  to  find  some  substitute  to  take  place 
of  the  food  that  had  been  kept  back  by  the  long  snow  and 
ice  weather. 

At  last  the  people  were  obliged  to  send  out  men  of  good 
judgment  to  seek  game  for  the  whole  people,  a  game  that 
can  be  easily  obtained  whether  it  be  big  or  small ;  anything 
that  will  do  for  food. 

These  men  soon  returned  who  reported  that  enough  game 
had  been  found  to  supply  all  the  people  and  had  brought  some 
home  with  them,  consisting  of  small  animals  and  birds, 
which  the  old  men  called  uMar-ta-qua-so," — Rabbit,  and 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  93 

"Pus-keh-gur-targi-leh," — Spruce  Partridge.  The  men  found 
the  country  full  of  such  food  game. 

Their  report  upon  the  discovery  of  the  larger  game  yet 
existing  wiped  away  the  fear  into  which  the  people  had  been 
thrown,  who  feared  that  the  deep  snow  and  ice  had  lain  so 
long  on  the  earth  had  destroyed  many  living  things,  there 
fore  these  happy  tidings  filled  the  people  with  much  joy, 
although  the  men  say  that  the  large  game  could  not  be  got, 
as  the  smoothness  of  the  country  with  the  hard  ice  enables 
them  to  get  easily  out  of  man's  reach.  But  the  mere 
knowledge  of  the  animals  surviving  the  destructive  period 
then  passing,  was  enough  to  create  a  general  rejoicing. 

When  the  people  went  after  the  food  game  which  had  been 
discovered,  they  found  the  birds  in  the  bog  lands  feeding  on 
the  boughs  of  the  short  and  scrubby  bog  spruces,  and  found 
the  bogs  filled  with  them,  and  were  so  tame  that  the  person 
wishing  to  gather  a  supply,  could,  without  difficulty,  knock 
them  off  and  down  from  the  trees.  But  after  a  while  they 
found  that  this  process  soon  disturbed  the  tameness  of  the 
birds  and  a  commotion  showed  itself  among  them  at  the 
coming  of  the  man. 

And  when  the  people  discovered  this,  a  method  of  snaring 
them  was  adopted  which  proved  to  be  the  thing  desired, 
The  method  of  securing  the  right  kind  of  material  to  make 
the  snares  was  soon  found  by  pounding  out  the  grains  of  the 
"Arlik-ba-ter-her," — brown  ash,  and  splitting  it  into  strings 
was  just  the  thing  wanted.  And  out  of  these  ash  strips 
made  the  snares  which  they  fastened  to  the  end  of  a  long 
pole  with  which  they  could  easily  snare  the  birds  by  passing 


94  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN. 

the  loop  over  their  heads  and  could  draw  them  down  without 
disturbing  the  rest  of  the  birds.  These  birds  were  always 
found  in  a  flock  so  large  that  the  people  moved  their  families 
to  them  from  which  they  could  secure  food  for  their  families 
for  many  moons.  The  rabbits  were  also  found  in  large 
numbers  who  haunted  the  land  between  the  bogs  and  the 
hard  and  higher  lands.  These  were  also  caught  with  the 
snares  made  from  the  strips  of  the  bark  of  "Wik-ki-bi-mi-si," 
bass  wood.  The  snares  were  placed  in  such  a  manner  in  the 
rabbits  path  that  the  little  animal  put  its  head  into  it  while 
passing  along,  but  the  size  of  the  open  space  left  in  the 
snare  would  not  admit  the  body,  therefore  the  noose  tightens 
around  its  neck  and  the  animal  gets  strangled. 

After  the  snow  and  ice  period  had  passed,  the  spruce 
patridge  and  the  rabbit  were  the  principal  winter  food  for 
those  less  able  to  go  on  long  journeys  for  larger  game, 
therefore  this  kind  of  game  was  afterwards  reserved  for  the  old 
and  infirm.  No  able  bodied  man  was  allowed  to  take  much  of 
it,  none  seemed  to  care  to  interfere  with  it  because  everybody 
had  been  instructed  from  childhood  to  help  and  provide  for 
the  old  and  infirm,  consequently  this  protective  practice 
was  kept  up  until  the  white  man  came. 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED  MAN.  95 


CHAPTER  V. 

The  fish  famine— The  capture  of  the  white  swan  and  the  white  spiritual  men 
driven  away. 

The  people  in  those  days  were  so  interested  in  these 
poor  and  unfortunate  ones,  that  men  would  go  and  build 
winter  wigwams  and  move  them  near  those  bogs  from 
which  they  could  secure  their  daily  food. 

After  the  food  game  had  been  found  the  people 
became  more  contented,  and  with  a  composure  waited 
for  the  summer  to  come.  During  the  snow  and  ice 
period  no  sickness  or  death  was  reported  and  the  good 
health  seemed  to  prevail  among  all,  until  the  hot 
weather  came,  when  some  were  taken  with  the  bad 
cough,  in  some  cases  death  was  the  result,  because  the 
medicine  could  not  be  properly  administered  to  all. 
Before  the  winter  came  to  a  close,  some  of  the  people 
who  were  less  favored  with  the  natural  patience  got 
very  much  discontented  notwithstanding  the  new 
discovery  made,  but  had  gone  around  to  agitate  a 
spirit  among  the  people  for  a  southern  exodus.  And 
by  going  around  among  the  several  tribes  or  bands  got 
quite  a  following,  and  many  families  did  start  to  seek 
summer  in  the  south,  and  although  the  summer  did 
return  in  due  season,  but  did  not  bring  back  the 
families  that  went  out  to  seek  it,  nor  have  they  returned 
to  this  day.  Their  departure  somewhat  cast  a  gloom 
over  the  land.  None  of  the  old  men  would  go,  they 
warned  those  that  were  so  ready  to  go  of  the  danger 


96  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN. 

of  their  light  and  inconsiderate  disposition  and  habits, 
telling  them  that  a  time  is  coming  when  a  man  be 
reckoned  according  to  his  mind  and  habits,  and  if  he  be 
so  that  he  is  not  contented  and  will  not  stay  where  the 
Great  Spirit  has  placed  him,  but  sets  himself  adrift, 
knowing  not  where  he  shall  land,  shall  some  day  wish  to 
stay  to  a  place  where  he  cannot,  because  having  started 
himself  on  a  drift,  drifting  about  he  must  become  and 
continue  in  it.  But  no  argument  could  change  their 
minds  and  they  started  for  the  south. 

Nothing  more  can  be  said  than  that  the  people  were 
now  anxiously  waiting  for  the  coming  of  summer. 
Just  about  this  time  the  May-May  appeared  again  ;  this 
time  he  came  in  a  very  happy  manner,  his  coming  was 
known  by  his  happy  singing  while  yet  he  was  a  long 
way  off.  And  when  near  enough,  and  had  alighted 
said,  "not  in  in  the  spirit,  but  in  the  flesh,"  and  with 
gladness  I  have  come,  and  I  sing  with  joy,  not  because 
this  being  my  last  visit  to  you,  no ;  I  sing  because  the 
summer  is  coming.  In  seven  moons  with  the  help  of  the 
warm  wind  from  the  noon,  the  sun  will  melt  the  ice  away. 
In  seven  suns  hence,  a  natural  snow  will  fall  and  it 
shall  be  seven  hands  deep,  but  the  sun  will  melt  it  all 
away  in  seven  days,  and  in  melting  it,  will  effect  the  ice 
which  now  covers  the  land,  so  that  in  seven  moons  all 
will  be  gone.  I  sing  because  nothing  like  this  will  be 
fall  you  again  while  the  world  stands.  After  delivering 
his  message  May-May  departed  to  come  no  more.  And 
when  the  seven  suns  had  passed,  a  snow  fell  which 
covered  the  ground  seven  days,  and  during  these  seven 
days  some  young  men  were  out  on  a  hunt,  and  accord- 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  97 

ing  to  custom  had  taken  one  old  man  with  them,  and 
on  coming  out  to  the  seashore  in  a  little  cove  where  a 
small  brook  came  out  to  the  sea,  the  young  men  dis 
covered  a  man's  track  upon  the  high  land,  the  track 
begun  from  the  shore  and  back  to  it,  and  around  the 
brook  of  the  fresh  water,  which  appeared  to  them  that 
some  one  had  been  carrying  water  from  the  brook  to 
the  salt  water  shore,  but  no  canoe  of  any  kind  could 
be  seen  moving  as  far  as  they  could  see.  When  this 
news  was  brought  to  the  old  man  he  at  once  proposed 
to  investigate  the  matter,  so  all  hands  went  down,  and 
upon  comparing  the  strange  tracks  to  those  they  made, 
there  was  a  vast  difference  in  three  ways,  first,  the 
person  that  made  the  strange  tracks  must  have  had  on 
moccasins  made  of  hard  substance  ;  second,  the  tracks 
were  larger  than  theirs ;  third,  and  the  most  strange 
part  of  all,  the  toes  pointed  outward  instead  of  inward 
like  those  they  made  themselves. 

Upon  arriving  at  a  conclusion,  that  the  tracks  were 
made  by  a  strange  person,  it  so  affected  the  old  man  that 
he  shed  tears,  saying,  that  whoever  made  the  tracks  must 
have  been  very  lonely,  and  said  further,  that  as  his 
strength  was  reduced  to  weakness  by  old  age  he  could  not 
overcome  the  emotion  that  came  upon  him.  Although 
the  reason  the  old  man  gave  to  the  young  men  was 
a  good  one,  yet  they  said  among  themselves  that  some 
thing  more  must  be  the  cause  of  the  old  man's  weeping, 
and  they  immediately  started  homeward ;  and  at  their 
arrival  among  their  people,  and  reporting  their  discovery 
and  the  weeping  of  the  old  man,  the  other  old  men  got 
together  to  discuss  the  matter  and  the  old  man  who 


98  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

had  been  overcome  with  grief  was  called  in  to  explain 
his  action  while  with  the  young  men.  And  to  the  old 
men  he  said,  " Upon  seeing  the  strange  tracks,  all  the 
warnings  which  have  been  given  us,  how  that  a  time  is 
coming  when  we  must  look  for  the  coming  of  the 
white  man  from  the  direction  of  the  rising  sun,  and  the 
tracks  were  so  very  strange,  not  like  our  people's  tract, 
came  upon  me  so  fresh  I  could  not  withhold  the  tears 
that  rushed  upon  my  brow.  Knowing  that  a  great 
change  must  follow  his  coming  it  made  me  weak  and 
the  weakness  overcame  me,  because  his  coming  will 
put  a  bar  to  our  happiness,  and  our  destiny  will  be  at 
the  mercy  of  the  events.  Being  satisfied  that  me  and 
the  young  men  have  seen  the  tracks  of  this  strange 
man,  it  becomes  as  our  gravest  duty  to  prepare  ourselves 
and  people  so  to  be  ready  to  meet  the  changes  which 
may  follow."  When  the  other  old  men  had  learned  of 
all  that  had  been  seen,  it  came  heavier  upon  them,  than 
did  the  departure  of  Klose-kur-beh.  This  news  was 
spread  among  all  the  people,  even  the  little  children 
were  told  what  had  been  seen  and  what  is  coming  to 
them.  The  commotion  it  created  was  so  great  that  the 
people 'hardly  realized  that  the  natural  snow  so  lately 
fallen  was  fast  melting  away  and  the  ice  had  become 
like  the  honeycomb  and  must  soon  follow  the  snow. 
When  the  time  came  which  had  been  set  by  May-May, 
the  summer  came,  bringing  with  it  the  birds,  leaves, 
plants  and  flowers.  Corn  was  put  into  the  ground 
which  in  due  season  came  up  out  of  the  ground  with  all 
the  appearance  of  much  promise,  and  with  a  good 
attention  and  care  a  good  crop  was  gathered  at  the 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  99 

harvest,  which  brought  back  the  old  happiness  which 
the  people  enjoyed  for  many  times  seventy  summers 
and  winters,  and  things  continued  in  that  way  until  the 
fish  famine  came  which  was  brought  about  in  this  way. 

Long  after  the  people  had  become  great  in  numbers 
and  the  tribes  or  bands  large,  a  very  dense  fog  came 
over  the  whole  country  and  remained  seven  moons,  and 
during  that  time  no  fish  could  be  found,  all  methods 
applied  to  get  them  failed,  therefore  the  supply  of  food 
became  scant  because  there  was  also  considerable 
difficulty  experienced  in  getting  other  game  food  owing 
to  the  density  of  the  fog  then  hanging  over  the  land. 
People  began  to  be  hungry,  children  crying  for  some 
thing  to  eat,  mothers  became  disheartened,  and  the  men 
worrying  because  they  could  not  find  game  animals  fast 
enough  to  supply  their  families ;  and  finally  the  people 
got  so  desperate  that  they  began  to  seek  the  aid  of  the 
spiritual  men  to  find  the  cause  of  all  this.  To  quiet 
the  people  in  their  fear  and  excitement,  the  most  noted 
spiritual  men,  those  that  are  in  the  near  vicinity 
called  other  spiritual  men  from  all  parts  of  the 
country,  some  came  from  the  most  remote  part  of  the 
land,  and  after  getting  together  and  selecting  seven 
good  men  from  among  them,  those  seven  begun  to 
labor  in  their  spiritual  way  to  search  and  find  out  the 
cause.  In  the  daytime  they  examined  the  land  and 
water,  nights  they  arose  in  the  air,  and  their  seven  days 
labor  brought  no  fruit. 

But  upon  their  rising  in  the  air  on  the  seventh  night, 
heard  voices  of  men  on  the  sea  in  the  direction  where  the 
sun  rises.  To  this  their  attention  was  directed,  but  after 


100  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED  MAN. 

exhausting  all  their  power  in  their  efforts  to  see  the  men 
whose  voices  they  had  heard  failed  and  were  obliged  to 
come  down,  still  deep  in  their  ignorance  of  the  cause. 
And  after  telling  what  they  had  done  and  the  poor 
success  they  had  met,  the  old  men  got  together  again 
and  after  much  deliberation  it  was  decided  to  send  to 
north  land  for  help.  And  immediately  seven  little 
girls  were  selected  and  brought  together  in  front  of  the 
youngest  ones  wigwam  where  they  repeated  these 
words,  "Oh,  mother  we  are  hungry,  please  bring  us 
food."  Seven  times  did  these  children  repeat  this  and  at 
the  end  of  the  seventh  calling,  "Mata-we-leh," — loon 
was  heard  coming  through  the  air  from  the  north  land. 
And  after  making  seven  circles  around  where  the  children 
was  standing,  lowered  and  was  soon  standing  among  the 
little  ones,  and  it  was  here  seen  that  instead  of  being  a 
loon  it  was  an  aged  woman.  No  one  knew  who  she  was, 
neither  did  she  make  herself  known  to  the  people,  but 
in  silence  stood  there  before  them  facing  the  north  land, 
and  while  thus  she  stood,  a  gentle  breeze  of  wind  came 
from  that  direction.  This  was  pleasing  to  the  people 
because  no  wind  had  swept  over  the  land  for  the  last 
seven  moons,  which  continued  until  all  the  fog  had  been 
blown  away  toward  the  noon,  leaving  the  land  and  sea 
clear.  And  as  soon  as  the  land  had  been  cleared  the 
woman  turned  her  face  in  the  direction  where  the  sun 
rises,  and  steadily  gazed  upon  an  object  which  was  in 
the  mid-ocean,  and  without  turning  her  face  from  that 
direction  raised  her  left  hand  as  if  calling  some  one 
from  the  north  land.  This  she  repeated  seven  times. 
After  she  had  done  this  she  turned  to  the  crowd  of 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED  MAN.  101 

people  which  was  then  great,  and  for  the  first  time 
since  her  arrival  spoke  to  them  and  said,  "The  cry 
of  your  little  ones  has  been  heard  in  the  north  land, 
and  I  have  come  to  their  calling,  and  soon  their  little 
hearts  as  well  as  all  other  hearts  will  be  made  glad,  and 
when  I  leave  you,  you  shall  be  happy  until  you  have  fallen 
into  the  ways  of  these  people  ;"  pointing  her  hand  toward 
the  mid-ocean,  "who  are  floating  there,  and  who  have 
brought  upon  you  this  trouble  and  hunger,  you  cannot 
find  the  animals  because  the  days  have  been  so  dark, 
you  cannot  find  fish  because  there  is  a  covering  over 
ail  the  fish  which  the  power  of  these  people  have  placed 
there,  it  is  the  spiritual  power  that  is  in  them,  and  if 
the  power  that  is  in  you  has  not  the  force  to  overcome 
it,  woe  unto  you."  Then  the  woman  turned  to  the 
spiritual  men  who  were  standing  near  and  called  forth 
the  one  nearest  to  her  and  said,  "bring  forth  the  stone," 
pointing  to  a  very  large  rock  which  was  near  them, 
but  it  was  so  large  and  heavy  the  man  did  not  have  the 
strength  to  carry  it  and  returned  without  it ;  and  the 
woman  called  the  next  spiritual  man,  who  also  failed  to 
accomplish  the  feat.  Upon  this  another  man  was 
called  until  the  seven  had  been  called  and  failed. 
Then  the  woman  went  forth  and  took  up  the  stone 
which  she  carried  to  the  edge  of  the  sea  and  threw  it 
out  in  the  ocean  which,  instead  of  sinking  rebounded  and 
laid  on  the  surface  of  the  water.  The  woman  then 
said,  "There,  how  can  fish  be  seen  when  there  is  such 
a  covering  over  the  water."  This  covering  has  been 
placed  there  by  the  spiritual  power  of  these  men  we 
see  in  the  mid-ocean.  And  it  is  my  duty  now  either 


102  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

to  capture  these  persons  or  make  them  flee  for  their 
safety.  If  we  succeed  in  capturing  them,  their  mission 
in  bringing  misery  and  suffering  among  you  will  virtu 
ally  be  at  an  end.  But  if  they  succeed  in  making  their 
escape,  look  for  them  again  some  day  in  the  same 
direction.  If  I  succeed  in  driving  them  away  with  the 
power  given  me  from  the  north  land,  they  will  learn 
the  power  of  it,  and  will  never  come  again  in  the 
spiritual  form,  but  shall  depend  upon  the  power  they 
have  gathered  in  their  learning,  and  with  such,  he  will 
next  come,  and  when  he  comes  watch  him  closely 
because  by  so  doing  you  will  learn  the  many  forms  of 
power  that  is  in  man.  After  the  woman  had  finished 
saying  these  words,  she  turned  to  the  spiritual  men 
and  said  to  them,  "Men  come  forth  and  bring  with  you 
in  your  right  hands,  the  fragments  of  wood  the  same 
that  you  use  when  you  shave  the  stone  into  implements, 
and  stand  near  the  water ;"  and  the  spiritual  men  came 
forward  and  took  a  position  each  one  as  commanded. 
Then  the  woman  said  again,  "Let  the  mothers  of  these 
seven  little  girls  who  sent  up  the  cry  to  the  north  land 
for  help,  lead  them  to  this  spot  that  they  may  draw  in 
the  "K'chi-wump-toqueh" — white  swan,  after  I  make 
fast  to  it." 

And  the  mothers  of  the  seven  little  ones  brought 
their  children  forth  as  commanded.  Then  the  woman 
pulled  out  seven  spears  of  long  hair  from  her  locks 
which  was  the  color  of  the  raven,  and  which  she 
twisted  into  a  small  rope,  which  she  placed  in  her  left 
hand  and  then  she  put  her  right  hand  into  her  bosom 
and  from  under  her  garments  pulled  out  a  piece  of 


LIFE   AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE   RED  MAN.  103 

bone  which  was  shaped  like  the  spear,  and  the  color  of 
which  was  red  just  like  the  blood.  To  this  blood 
colored  little  spear  the  woman  fastened  the  hair  rope, 
and  took  the  spear  in  her  right  hand,  gave  to  the  seven 
little  girls  the  other  end  of  the  hair  rope  to  hold  in 
their  hands,  saying :  ''When  you  hear  the  swan  cry 
in  pain,  draw  in  the  rope  until  the  bird  be  laying  at 
the  feet  of  the  seven  men,  then  your  work  will  be 
done,  and  let  your  mothers  take  you  away  in  peace." 
And  again  the  woman  said  to  the  spiritual  men  : 
"When  the  little  girls  have  drawn  the  bird  to  them 
and  still  have  life  in  him  let  the  oldest  of  you  cut  off 
his  head  with  the  wood  he  holds  in  his  hand.  Then 
let  the  next  oldest  cut  off  the  right  wing,  and  the  next 
man  shall  cut  off  the  left  wing,  and  the  fourth  man 
shall  cut  open  the  birds  belly,  while  the  last  three  men 
be  standing  ready  to  cut  off  the  heads  of  the  three 
persons  who  are  inside  of  the  bird,  you  shall  know 
they  are  the  right  ones  because  they  are  white,  the 
same  color  like  the  bird.  After  cutting  off  their  heads 
let  all  the  bodies  lay  near  the  water  to  be  covered  up 
by  the  shaking  of  the  water  and  land.  It  may  be  so 
that  I  fail  in  capturing  them  and  they  escape,  if  so, 
the  little  girls  will  only  draw  in  a  dead  swan,  because 
the  three  spiritual  men  will  have  made  a  large  hole  in 
its  back  through  which  they  have  flown.  And  the 
swan  you  shall  let  lay  to  be  covered  up  with  the  frag 
ments  of  the  earth,  and  the  water  will  wash  it  away. 
Though  these  men  may  escape  the  shaking  of  the 
water  and  land,  they  may  be  far  away  when  it  comes, 
yet  they  shall  feel  the  shake  of  it,  and  shall  hear  the 


104  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

sound,  and  a  fear  shall  come  upon  them  so  they  will 
never  come  to  you  again  with  the  spiritual  power 
because  the  shake  of  the  water  and  the  shake  of  the 
land  they  shall  always  fear.  And  it  is  well  that  there 
be  some  power  reserved  which  shall  be  brought  upon 
those  who  shall  become  so  great  in  power  that  others 
will  not  be  able  to  overcome,  and  it  is  well  also  that, 
will  and  might  shall  have  a  short  life.  The  man  of 
will  and  might  shall  enjoy  his  own  way  until  all  the 
land  he  occupies  shakes  until  it  shall  open,  wherein  he 
shall  fall,  and  shall  not  have  the  power  to  get  out 
because  in  all  his  works  he  shall  never  be  able  to  find 
the  way  to  escape  it." 

After  this  saying,  the  woman  raised  up  the  little 
spear  with  her  right  hand  and  threw  it  at  the  swan 
which  was  laying  in  the  mid-ocean,  and  when  it  was 
going  through  the  air  the  woman  flew  after  it,  she  being 
in  the  form  of  the  white  loon,  and  the  people  saw  the 
swan  in  its  efforts  to  rise,  but  the  little  spear  had  done 
its  work  and  the  bird's  cry  with  pain  was  plainly 
heard,  and  the  little  girls  began  to  haul  in  on  the  rope 
until  the  game  was  drawn  ashore  which  was  found 
dead.  Nothing  could  be  seen  on  the  bird  excepting 
one  large  hole  in  its  back.  And  upon  looking  into 
this  hole  only  three  vacant  seats  could  be  seen,  and  at 
this  moment  the  white  loon  was  coming  toward  the 
land,  part  of  the  time  on  the  surface  and  another 
moment  be  under  the  water.  When  it  came  where  the 
body  of  the  swan  lay,  and  upon  getting  out  of  the 
water  and  had  transformed  herself  to  a  woman  said: 
"Now  I  shall  carry  back  this  piece  of  bone  to  the  north 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  105 

land  and  before  the  sun  goes  down  I  will  return  and 
shall  then  break  up  all  the  covering  which  have  been 
hiding  the  fish  ;  and  when  it  breaks  up,  it  shall  fly  in 
pieces  to  the  shore  into  piles,  and  whatever  fragment 
remains  you  shall  keep  and  shall  make  into  some  use 
ful  implements,  because  it  being  the  fragment  of  the 
first  contention  between  you  and  the  strange  people. 
When  the  covering  breaks  there  will  be  a  great  shock, 
therefore  you  must  all  go  away  from  this  spot,  go  far 
back  on  the  high  land,  from  where  you  can  look  down 
and  see  the  work."  At  this  the  woman  pulled  the 
spear  out  of  the  dead  swan's  body,  and  the  people 
began  to  go  back  on  to  the  high  lands. 

And  after  getting  on  to  a  safe  place  and  upon  looking 
down  to  the  sea,  beheld  the  same  white  loon  coming 
from  the  north  very  swiftly,  and  when  it  reached  the 
place  opposite  where  the  dead  swan  lay,  it  made  its 
usual  circles,  there  it  stood  very  high  and  very  still  for 
a  few  moments,  then  it  turned  itself  into  a  great  ball  of 
fire,  and  fell  swiftly  down  to  the  water ;  and  when  it 
struck  the  water,  the  earth  shook  and  the  roar  of  it  was 
great.  So  great  was  the  roar,  all  the  land  shook  and 
stood  trembling  for  a  long  time,  and  the  commotion  of 
the  water  was  also  very  great  which  brought  the  fishes 
to  the  surface  and  could  plainly  be  seen  jumping  glee 
fully  out  of  the  troubled  waters.  This  great  shock  also 
brought  back  the  fog.  The  return  of  the  fog,  however, 
was  but  a  short  duration,  it  only  remained  seven  days 
and  when  it  cleared  away  and  the  sun  shone  there  was 
much  happiness,  because  the  people  were  already  catch 
ing  as  many  fishes  as  was  needed. 


106  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OP  THE   RED  MAN. 

In  the  midst  of  this  happiness  it  was  found  that  the 
woman  had  gone  to  the  north  land,  had  departed  while 
the  fog  was  prevailing,  and  upon  going  down  to  the 
seashore,  the  people  found  fragments  of  stone  in  large 
heaps  all  along  on  the  shores  of  the  coast. 

Remembering  what  had  been  commanded  them, 
they  gathered  the  stone  and  made  into  small  implements. 
They  were  not  able  to  make  the  large  tools  out  of  it, 
because  the  spiritual  men  were  not  able  to  shave  it 
with  the  wood.  They  could  only  shape  it  by  hacking 
and  chipping  off  the  edges  so  to  make  small  spears  and 
arrow  heads.  Seeing  this  the  old  men  called  the  stone 
"Keh-tungu-so-arpusque,"  spirit  stone.  The  heaps  of 
these  stones  remained  on  the  shores  many  times  seventy 
summers  and  winters,  and  the  time  it  remained  in  these 
heaps  the  spiritual  men  were  able  to  gather  and  save  a 
very  large  amount  of  it  for  future  uses ;  so  much  of  it 
was  saved  that  it  lasted  until  after  the  white  man  intro 
duced  among  them  tools  made  from  different  substances. 

In  all  these  years  while  all  these  different  events  were 
taking  place,  the  spiritual  men  were  busy  faithfully 
performing  what  was  required  of  them.  All  were 
working  for  the  good  of  the  people,  never  showed 
among  themselves  any  other  kind  of  feeling  only  that 
was  kind  and  brotherly,  until  after  the  white  man  was 
seen  sailing  in  his  strange  craft  along  the  coast. 

This  long  looked  for  event  created  such  a  stir  that 
the  note*d  men  were  called  to  discuss  the  matter  and  to 
see  what  must  be  done  about  it,  and  on  their  getting 
together  it  was  decided  that  there  shall  be  some  good 
spiritual  men  selected  and  sent  on  along  the  coast  to 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED  MAN.  107 

watch  the  strange  people's  movements.  These  people 
were  considered  very  strange  because  they  were  not 
white  as  the  snow,  and  not  so  white  as  the  people 
expected  them  to  be,  but  were  brown  and  hairy  people. 
Whether  they  were  creatures  with  the  speech  or  not, 
none  knew  because  no  one  had  heard  them  talk. 
However  it  was  determined  to  have  them  watched  and 
this  watching  to  continue  until  his  true  description  and 
habits  had  been  learned.  As  has  been  said  before 
that  no  trouble  among  the  spiritual  men  had  come,  but 
as  soon  as  the  selection  of  the  best  and  noted  of  them 
had  been  made  and  became  known,  those  that  were 
considered  less  noted  and  had  not  received  the  appoint 
ment  became  jealous  of  their  brother  spiritual  men 
who  had  been  selected,  and  immediately  began  to  show 
their  feeling  towards  them,  a  feeling  which  showed 
hatred,  and  began  to  do  their  work  in  getting  followers 
and  gathering  them  into  their  folds.  And  as  soon  as 
they  saw  that  the  people  were  also  divided  in  the 
approval  of  the  selection,  declared  themselves  as  ene 
mies  of  the  selected  ones.  They  declared  that  the 
people  had  trampled  upon  and  had  abused  them, — the 
same  kind  of  power  existed  in  them  as  well  as  in  those 
that  had  been  preferred ;  and  that  the  time  had  arrived 
they  must  show  them  how  much  power  they  possessed. 
And  after  declaring  and  had  entered  into  this  deter 
mination,  the  disappointed  spiritual  men  began  to 
agitate  the  minds  of  their  friends  to  discord,  each  of 
them  having  a  large  influence  among  the  people,  the 
whole  country  was  thrown  into  different  bands.  See 
ing  this,  the  disappointed  soon  made'  aggressive  move- 


108  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RED  MAN. 

inents  against  the  selected ;  although  the  old  men 
advised  peace  and  harmony,  their  advice  was  only  met 
with  scorn  by  the  disappointed  ones,  saying,  "That 
the  people  will  never  know  the  power  that  is  in  those 
that  they  discarded  until  it  be  shown  them,  and  this 
they  are  bound  to  do."  Here  the  intersview  with 
them  ended  and  the  old  men  turned  away  from  them 
with  heavy  hearts  and  great  sorrow,  because  the  happi 
ness  of  the  red  man  have  now  come  to  its  end.  With 
a  depressing  spirit,  each  old  man  went  to  his  own 
lodge,  only  to  point  out  with  trembling  hand  to 
those  that  loves  peace  the  destiny  of  the  red  man. 
When  this  became  known  the  lodges  of  the  old  men 
were  constantly  thronged  by  the  populace,  not  only  to 
quiet  them  and  reduce  the  sorrow  they  exhibited,  or  to 
alleviate  the  grief  that  was  bowing  down  their  already 
bent  and  feebled  frames ;  but  also  to  learn  the  true 
prophecy  which  was  expected  of  them.  When  inter 
viewed,  they  hid  nothing,  but  were  very  frank  in  giving 
their  views  upon  what  might  be  expected  and  did  not 
hesitate  in  recommending  preparation  to  meet  any 
emergency  looking  to  hostility  which  might  be  brought 
about  by  this  bad  feeling.  And  it  can  plainly  be  seen 
that  this  late  news  spread  a  shadow  of  gloom  over  the 
whole  region,  and  the  happiness  which  was  in  the  grasp 
of  the  people  slipped  out  from  their  hands,  and  has 
never  returned,  even  to  this  day. 

When  the  war  begun,  it  was  brought  on  by  the  dis 
appointed  class,  and  it  was  carried  on  in  such  a  scale 
it  was  not  so  destructive  as  it  was  feared,  for  instead  of 
uniting,  the  leaders  of  the  disappointed  preferred  to 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  109 

achieve  heroic  honors  without  the  aid  of  their  fellow 
disappointed  spiritual  brethren.  They  would  only 
select  a  few  from  their  followers  whom  they  led  to 
battle.  Every  spiritual  man  who  lead  the  men  to  battle 
are  called,  "Mur-oo-wet," — The  commander. 

The  weapons  used  in  the  battle  were  the  "Tur-bee" 
and  "Par-queh,"  bow  and  arrow.  "Ed-dunk-he-gan," 
stone  sling  and  the  "Ms-squar-jees,"  war  club.  And 
in  time  of  war  no  mercy  was  shown  to  the  defenseless, 
old  people  and  women  were  despatched  to  eternity 
when  found,  even  the  little  babes  were  slain,  no 
prisoners  of  war  taken,  only  such  ones  the  enemy 
knows  to  be  most  beloved  and  esteemed,  such  persons 
are  taken  alive  only  to  be  cruely  tortured ;  this  is  done 
to  irritate  the  feelings  of  the  prisoners  friends.  Burn 
ing  at  the  stake  was  the  principal  measure  meted  out  to 
the  unfortunate  captives.  Exchange  of  prisoners  was 
never  entered  into  nor  practiced.  The  only  way  to 
rescue  a  friend  from  the  enemy  is  to  keep  on  fighting 
and  if  successful  in  routing  the  enemy,  and  if  in  his 
flight  had  not  time  to  stop  and  slay  the  prisoners,  your 
friend  be  restored  to  you  alive.  The  war  was  carried 
on  mostly  in  the  night  time,  the  invading  army  watches 
closely  and  only  when  he  finds  the  invaded  to  be  in 
his  sleep  when  the  attacks  are  made.  The  selected 
portion  of  the  spiritual  men  never  made  practice  only 
to  be  on  the  defense.  All  of  the  battles  were  created 
and  brought  on  by  the  disappointed,  and  the  attacks 
were  made  by  them.  Only  twice  did  the  selected 
spiritual  men  make  an  aggressive  movement,  which 
we  will  mention  in  another  page.  In  all  this  war  period 


110  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

the  spiritual  men  resorted  to  all  sorts  of  spiritual  power 
they  possessed  during  the  raging  of  the  battle. 

In  some  instances  when  closely  cornered,  would  dis 
appear  on  the  spot,  other  times  only  some  swift  footed 
animal  be  seen  leaving  the  battle  ground,  while  others 
would  turn  into  birds  and  fly  away.  Although  the 
spiritual  men  had  all  been  taught  never  to  use  the 
spiritual  power  in  subduing  the  other  by  taking  life, 
yet  in  times  of  war  many  cases  of  disregard  to  the 
teaching  was  shown,  regardless  of  the  pain  of  losing 
it,  therefore  some  lively  chase  often  took  place, 
and  in  such  a  case,  when  a  spiritual  man  chases  another 
and  has  the  power  to  overtake  the  other,  that  will  be 
the  end  of  the  one  overtaken,  and  in  such  a  case  the 
remains  of  the  slain  never  was  found  because  the  slayer 
never  tells  what  became  of  his  victim  nor  how  the 
conquest  was  accomplished.  The  object  in  all  the  wars 
was  only  to  subdue  one  another.  The  conquerer  never 
takes  possession  any  part  of  the  country  that  he 
conquers, nor  require  any  indemnity  from  the  conquered  ; 
will  not  even  take  away  things  belonging  to  them, 
though  in  some  instances  some  useful  things  were 
destroyed.  There  were  very  few  battles  fought  in  the 
day  time ;  such  battles  took  place  only  when  two 
opposite  armies  met  by  accident.  According  to  the 
account  given  by  the  latest  traditional  story  tellers, 
this  foolish  and  cruel  war  was  carried  on  many  seven 
times  seven  years  or  until  two  certain  young  men  had 
grown  up  among  the  selected  class.  These  two  were 
most  wonderful  being.  They  were  a  mystery  to  all, 
and  were  mysterous  on  account  of  their  most  wonderful 
power  which  they  claimed  to  be  spiritual. 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN.  Ill 

They  had  the  power  that  when  in  battle  and  in 
giving  the  war  cry  or  yell,  all  the  enemy  that  hears 
them,  falls  to  the  ground  and  lay  helpless  for  a  long 
time  to  the  mercy  of  their  enemy,  and  in  this  way 
and  by  these  means  the  selected  became  victors  in 
many  of  the  minor  battles.  It  so  happened  that  there 
were  no  big  battles  took  place  while  these  two  reigned 
in  battles,  because  their  power  had  become  known 
among  the  disappointed  and  they  were  very  shy  of 
them.  But  of  course  the  people  of  the  land  have 
increased  so  much  and  have  covered  such  a  vast  por 
tion  of  the  country,  they  were  not  able  to  cover  the 
whole  of  it  with  their  protection,  therefore  the  enemy 
had  some  chances  in  committing  depredations  and  mur 
ders  among  some  families  living  on  the  outskirts  of  the 
country,  but  this  did  not  continue  very  long.  Meeting 
repulses  on  every  hand  and  knowing  that  they  had 
created  a  bitter  feeling;  among  whom  they  considered 
their  enemies,  and  realizing  the  danger  awaiting  them, 
sought  safety  and  started  southward  in  search  of  those 
that  had  gone  before,  who  went  away  south  when  the 
ice  laid  on  the  land.  The  old  men  of  the  land  did  not 
advise  them  to  stay,  but  on  the  contrary,  were  rather 
anxious  to  have  them  go.  When  the  people  knew  this 
there  was  a  great  rejoicing  because  it  was  then  thought 
that  the  trouble  had  passed  away,  and  another  selection 
was  made  from  among  the  spirited  men  to  aid  those 
who  had  been  so  true  and  faithful  in  watching  the 
movements  of  the  people  who  had  been  seen  sailing 
on  the  coast.  In  making  the  selection  the  two  young 
men  whose  power  was  found  to  be  so  wonderful  were 


112  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

retained  to  guard  the  people  against  all  invasion.  A 
name  was  given  to  each  of  those  young  men,  and  it 
was  the  first  time  that  any  person  received  such  a  dis 
tinction  so  young  as  these  young  men  were.  The  old 
men  gave  one  of  them  the  name  of  "Menus-kose," — 
Ocean  Island,  and  the  other,  "Mundo-ok-koke,"— Devil 
slayer. 

While  these  two  men  were  young  in  age  their  power 
was  not  needed  as  the  enemy  had  gone  so  far  south 
that  it  was  thought  they  would  never  return.  Peace 
did  reign  for  a  long  while  and  during  this  intervale 
those  that  were  sent  to  follow  and  watch  the  move 
ments  of  the  strange  people  had  returned  and  gave  an 
accurate  account  of  their  discoveries,  the  description  of 
those  people,  the  size  of  their  large  canoe  which  was 
propelled  by  a  brown  colored  cloth  spread  in  the  wind, 
and  had  smaller  canoes  lashed  on  the  side  of  the  large 
one,  which  the  hairy  men  would  lower  to  the  water, 
get  into  them  and  move  around  in  them  every  time  the 
big  canoe  finds  a  quiet  and  safe  harbor  in  which  it  can 
lay  while  the  men  be  out  examining  the  shores, 
islands,  coves  and  rivers.  The  men  that  were  sent  out 
to  watch  these  people  made  practice  to  secrete  them 
selves  from  the  view  of  these  strange  people  until 
their  big  canoe  had  sailed  far  out  in  the  ocean  and  got 
beyond  their  sight,  which  was  done  between  sunset  and 
sunrise.  Seeing  that  the  big  canoe  had  gone  out  of 
sight,  heading  when  last  seen  in  the  southern  direction, 
then  the  watchmen  directed  their  course  toward  their 
homes,  which  they  gladly  reached  after  having  been 
absent  for  many  moons  and  when  they  reached  their 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  113 

people  they  were  gladly  received  by  them.  Previous  to 
the  return  of  the  watchmen,  some  young  men  were 
out  on  a  hunting  expedition,  who,  when  getting  upon  a 
high  point  of  land  overlooking  the  sea,  beheld  a  large 
craft  in  plain  view  to  them,  moving  very  briskly 
before  the  strong  wind  then  blowing,  and  the  craft  was 
heading  south.  These  young  men  were  so  far  away 
from  their  people,  the  strange  craft  had  sailed  out  of 
sight  before  they  could  call  their  people's  attention  to 
it.  The  report  of  the  young  men  of  what  they  had 
seen  was  confirmed  by  the  watchmen  when  they 
arrived  home  from  their  watching  expedition.  The 
stories  of  the  two  parties  in  giving  their  description  of 
the  big  canoe  agreed  in  every  respect.  All  told  how 
that  the  craft  was  going  south.  The  story  told  by 
those  that  were  sent  to  watch  was  to  the  effect,  that 
they  followed  the  people  up  into  a  large  river  which  was 
so  wide  at  its  mouth  that  they  did  not  cross  its  waters, 
because  their  canoes  were  so  small  they  considered  it  a 
dangerous  thing  to  undertake  and  were  obliged  to  keep 
near  the  land  on  the  south  side  of  the  river.  But  the 
strange  people  went  up  it  so  far  the  river  became  much 
narrower  and  their  small  canoe  could  cross  it  without 
much  difficulty.  And  it  was  here  that  they  made  so 
close  examination  of  the  craft,  especially  in  the  night 
time  when  it  was  very  dark,  they  were  so  close  to  it, 
they  could  easily  hear  the  people  talk  in  a  language 
they  could  not  understand. 

These  people  must  be  great  lovers  of  fish  food  as 
they  could  be  seen  fishing  every  calm  morning.  They 
would  haul  very  large  fishes  up  over  the  side  of  their 


114  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

big  canoe ;  and  these  people  did  not  carry  anything 
away  only  some  water.  In  those  days  a  man  of  false 
hood  was  not  known  among  them  therefore  everything 
these  men  told  was  fully  believed,  which  established 
the  fact  that  white  man  had  come  to  the  red  man's 
world.  This  discovery  was  not  looked  upon  as  any 
thing  strange,  since  it  has  been  foretold  by  the  old 
prophets ;  every  body  looked  for  it,  even  the  children 
expected  it.  Since  the  belief  of  the  coming  of  the 
white  man  had  been  so  well  established,  there  was 
plenty  of  work  for  the  old  men  !  All  the  daily  topics 
was  on  this  subject ;  meetings  of  the  old  men  were  fre 
quently  held,  and  the  subject  on  what  course  to  take 
upon  the  matter  was  carefully  and  seriously  considered, 
and  after  the  subject  had  been  fully  discussed  by  all  the 
people  throughout  the  country,  it  was  thought  best,  and 
was  so  decided,  that  when  the  strange  people  came,  to 
receive  them  as  friends,  and  if  possible  make  brothers 
of  them. 

After  this  sentiment  had  been  planted  in  the  hearts 
and  minds  of  all  the  people,  all  the  attention  was  then 
directed  to  the  movements  of  the  discontented  who  had 
withdrawn,  or  whose  act  of  secession  was  still  so  fresh 
in  the  minds  of  the  people.  Seeing  that  they  had 
increased  greatly  in  numbers  during  the  many  times 
seven  years  of  almost  silent  interval,  had  become  bold 
and  had  sought  the  way  to  carry  out  the  vow  they  had 
made  and  proclaimed  upon  their  going  out. 

Frequent  reports  have  come,  how  they  have  been 
seen  and  threatening  to  do  violence  among  the  people 
who  are  living  in  the  extreme  southern  part  of  the 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE  RED  MAN.  115 

country,  not  only  capturing  some  defenseless  persons  and 
torturing  them,  but  in  many  cases  carry  off  captives 
for  the  purpose  of  torture,  and  would,  after  carrying 
them  far  away  from  home  leave  them  there  either  to 
die  or  find  their  way  home  the  best  they  could,  leaving 
no  food  for  them. 

The  women  captives  liberated  in  this  manner  were 
allowed  to  go  unbound,  but  the  other  sex  was  always 
securely  bound  so  that  they  could  not  feed  or  otherwise 
help  themselves  ;  thus  many  suffered  in  that  way. 

Up  to  this  period  no  lives  had  been  taken  outright ; 
those  suffered  death  met  it  by  the  results  of  the  cruel 
tortures.  When  all  this  trouble  being  known,  it  spread 
like  the  wild  fire  and  the  excitement  it  caused  was  in 
tense,  the  feeling  it  created  so  bitter  it  was  almost 
beyond  control  especially  when  it  was  known  as  being 
the  works  of  the  spiritual  men  of  the  enemy.  This 
bitter  feeling  was  somewhat  allayed  by  the  advice  of 
the  old  men  who  immediately  called  in  all  of  their 
spiritual  men  whom  they  urged  to  begin  an  active 
operation  against  the  enemy,  not  only  to  protect  their 
people,  but  also  to  make  a  move  to  subdue  the  enemy's 
spiritual  warriors.  Thus  the  red  man's  war  was 
declared  and  begun.  In  this  war,  if  it  be  called  such, 
the  head  ones  of  it  were  the  spiritual  men,  and  naturally 
it  was  conducted  in  a  manner  to  their  direction,  there 
fore  some  very  curious  tactics  were  resorted  to,  and  many 
puzzling  aspects  were  witnessed  by  those  who  were  not 
familiar  with  the  spiritual  power.  In  some  of  these 
engagements  the  leaders,  or  the  spiritual  men  met  first, 
because  they  are  always  at  the  head  of  their  forces, 


116  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

very  often  without  giving  orders  to  their  men,  plunged 
headlong  into  battle  between  themselves,  using  all  the 
power  there  was  in  them,  while  the  rest  of  the  forces 
be  looking  on.  Here  the  none-spiritual  often  see  some 
queer  sights  while  waiting  the  results  of  the  battle 
between  their  leaders.  When  in  such  engagements,  the 
spiritual  men  show  such  a  power  that  they  were  able  to 
disappear  in  an  instant  and  in  a  moment  later  reappear 
on  a  far  different  spot  from  where  last  seen,  and  when 
one  conquers,  would  be  seen  coming  toward  their  men 
which  the  conquered  force  is  not  slow  in  perceiving, 
because  it  is  to  them  as  a  signal  to  make  a  hasty  retreat 
for  safety  or  fight  without  a  leader,  and  when  a  retreat 
thus  being  made,  it  is  then  the  conqueror  pursues,  kills 
or  take  such  prisoners  they  wished.  No  one  was  ever 
known  being  saved  and  life  spared  by  surrendering, 
therefore  each  one  must  struggle  hard  for  an  escape  or 
to  fight  till  disabled,  or  the  death  blow  comes.  In 
those  days  the  power  of  the  spiritual  men  were  not 
alike,  there  were  some  who  could  see  a  long  distance, 
and  others  can  hear  a  long  way,  some  can  send  their 
voices  through  the  air  to  any  distance  desired,  while 
others  had  the  power  in  their  war  cry  or  yell  that  it 
takes  away  the  strength  of  those  they  intend  to  disable 
so  they  fall  to  the  ground  and  lay  helpless  for  some 
moments  and  become  an  easy  prey  to  the  enemy. 

This  peculiar  power  was  never  known  to  exist  among 
the  warriors  of  the  south,  and  it  is  due  to  this  that  the 
southern  forces  abandoned  their  aggressive  expeditions 
northward  for  many  years,  and  during  this  quiet  period 
some  explorers  from  the  south  came  along  east  in  their 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED  MAN.  117 

canoes.  These  explorers  were  old  women  who  had 
paddled  their  canoe  all  the  way  along  the  coast 
from  "Koeh-suk"  at  the  pines,  seeking  to  find  the  oyster 
and  clam  beds  which  the  people  found  and  lived  on 
during  their  temporary  stay  while  on  their  journey 
south  after  seceding  from  the  north.  Being  women 
with  old  age,  they  were  not  molested  but  were  allowed 
to  do  their  errand.  They  were  no  other  but  the  old 
women,  yet  they  were  very  closely  watched  in  all  their 
movements  and  doings. 

After  exploring  different  points,  these  old  women 
discovered  the  oyster  beds  and  were  able  to  locate  the 
very  spot.  Not  only  oysters  found  at  the  place,  but 
there  were  also  forests  of  oak  bearing  acorns  in  the 
close  proximity.  When  this  was  known  the  people 
rejoiced,  and  the  old  men  were  allowed  to  make  a 
promise  to  the  southern  old  women  who  had  come  and 
made  this  discovery,  that  they  will  be  allowed  to  come 
and  gather  such  supply  as  they  wished  for  winter  use  so 
long  as  their  people  will  not  meddle  the  poor  and  infirm 
on  either  side  during  the  harvesting  for  the  winter 
supply,  and  if,  after  they  have  returned  home  to  their 
people  will  call  together  seven  of  their  old  men,  and 
will  induce  them  to  come  north,  they  would  not  be 
molested,  but  an  arrangement  will  be  made  with  them 
so  that  the  old  and  infirm  both  from  the  north  and  the 
south  may  have  an  equal  privilege  to  come  and  get  their 
winter  supply  of  oysters  and  acorns  unmolested.  This 
generous  offer  of  the  old  men  of  the  north  so  pleased 
the  old  women  of  the  south,  it  affected  them  very  much 
and  they  made  a  solemn  vow  and  promise  that  the  offer 


118  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN. 

will  be  accepted,  and  that  the  old  men  of  the  south  may 
be  looked  for  who  will  come  to  help  make  some  wise 
arrangements. 

Very  early  the  next  season,  the  seven  old  men  did 
come,  when  a  wholesome  treaty  was  made,  which 
was  always  observed  and  well  kept.  These  oyster 
beds  were  so  productive  that  it  gave  a  supply  to  all 
that  wished  for  the  period  of  many  times  seventy  years, 
so  that  the  shells  of  this  food  fish  was  piled  up  almost 
mountain  high  on  the  shore  of  a  river  bank  for  a  long 
distance.  And  the  oyster  period  was  enjoyed  to  with 
in  quite  recently,  so  that  the  mounds  of  these  shells 
can  now  be  plainly  seen  on  the  coast  of  Maine.  Clam 
beds  were  also  found  later,  pretty  near  the  spot  of  the 
oyster  beds,  a  little  toward  the  direction  of  the  rising 
sun.  All  these  shell  fish  were  cured  by  drying. 

Although  the  people  stay  around  those  oyster  beds 
or  near  them  almost  the  year  round,  but  those  who  lived 
far  away  did  not  visit  the  place  until  just  before  the 
leaves  began  to  fall,  they  then  go  there  and  gather  oys 
ters,  clams  and  acorns  for  winter  use.  The  oysters 
and  clams  were  dried  in  the  sun,  and  when  they  have 
been  sufficiently  dried  are  packed  in  "Mik-nur-queh — 
birch  bark  packing  box,"  in  which  they  can  be  kept 
until  winter.  The  "Ar-nass-cum-nal" — acorns,  were 
also  gathered  in  their  season  and  dried  ;  and  in  the 
winter  time,  a  family  wishing  to  have  a  fashionable 
dinner,  cooks  the  dried  oysters  in  water,  well  seasoned 
with  the  bear  or  seal  oil,  and  after  the  oysters  are  well 
soaked  and  boiled,  the  pounded  acorns  were  added 
enough  to  give  it  a  good  flavor.  The  clams  were 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN.  119 

secured,  cooked  and  served  precisely  the  same  way. 
As  has  been  stated  before,  that  this  place  was  set  apart 
and  reserved  for  all  the  old  and  infirm  ;  therefore 
when  the  harvest  time  comes  the  place  contained 
many  people  from  all  parts  of  the  country,  and  here 
they  exchanged  a  great  deal  of  information,  and  in  this 
way  the  people  of  the  north  learned  all  about  the 
southern  people.  Those  that  came  from  the  south, 
seeing  that  they  had  the  same  privileges  in  common 
with  the  northern  people,  felt  very  friendly  and  did  not 
hesitate  in  giving  a  full  account  of  their  people  at  the 
south,  and  through  these  exchanges  it  was  learned  that 
while  on  their  voyage  south,  and  when  these  oyster 
beds  were  discovered,  some  wanted  to  go  back  home, 
or  place  where  their  home  had  been,  and  join  their 
people  and  friends  again  in  peace,  but  their  leaders,  the 
spiritual  men  opposed  to  any  and  all  such  propositions 
and  urged  the  people  on  further  south.  And  after  a 
long  time,  a  dispute  arose  among  the  non-spiritual, 
which  in  time  resulted  in  dividing  the  people  again. 
Having  already  made  a  good  selection  of  the  country 
and  had  been  located,  many  concluded  to  make  this 
land  to  be  their  home,  while  others  preferred  to  take 
backward  steps  toward  the  north,  because  they  were 
very  much  disheartened  in  learning  they  were  to  fight 
for  their  existence. 

The  supply  of  the  stone  to  make  the  arrow  heads 
and  spear  becoming  scarce  with  them,  a  party  of  men 
were  sent  south  to  explore  the  region  for  the  purpose 
of  finding  such  stone.  These  men  after  travelling 
seven  summers  and  winters,  crossing  many  large  rivers 


120  LIFE   AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

and  lakes,  and  after  seeing  another  ocean  extending 
towards  the  setting  sun,  did  find  some  such  a  stone, 
but  none  could  be  found  on  the  shores  same  as  in  the 
north ;  what  they  found  was  on  the  base  of  the  moun 
tains  away  from  any  sea  shore,  and  brought  home  so 
small  an  amount  of  it,  did  not  give  such  encourage 
ment  as  was  expected.  The  spiritual  men  could  hold 
the  people  together  no  longer  and  were  obliged  to  let 
such  portion  go  that  wished  ;  a  large  part  of  them 
came  toward  the  north,  only  a  small  number  going 
further  south,  and  just  how  far  south  was  never  defin 
itely  known.  Some  of  them,  comprising  the  largest  part 
concluded  to  remain  on  the  spot  previously  selected, 
because  it  was  near  the  mouth  of  a  river  abounding  with 
game  and  fish  ;  oysters  were  also  found  but  the  beds  of 
them  were  small  and  produced  but  a  little,  more  clams 
and  seal  were  found  than  oysters,  and  for  this,  the  portion 
that  were  dissatisfied  came  north  and  located  on  the  south 
ern  shore  of  a  large  bay  where  clams,  seal  and  eels 
were  found  in  abundance,  and  after  making  a  settle 
ment  on  the  place  the  name  given  to  it  was  "Go~eh-suk" 
— at  the  pines.  This  name  was  given  to  it  because 
every  point  of  land  in  the  bay  was  covered  with  the 
growth  of  pine,  hence  the  name  of  uGo-eh-suk." 
From  this  place  the  old  women  who  have  been  already 
mentioned,  started  toward  the  north  to  hunt  up  the 
oyster  beds  which  they  found  as  has  been  stated  before. 
The  people  of  the  north  hearing  these  reports,  caused 
them  to  be  contented  ;  and  after  this  wholesome  arrange 
ment  had  been  entered  into,  the  visits  of  the  southern 
men  for  the  purpose  of  committing  depredation  ceased 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED   MAN.  121 

for  a  long  period,  which  brought  much  happiness.  But 
this  did  not  last  always,  as  after  many  years  the  south 
ern  old  people  brought  a  report,  that  the  people  at 
Go-eh-suk,  was  about  to  be  led  by  a  War-Spirited 
man  who  has  assumed  the  name  of  "War-har-weh, — 
greatest  of  all,"  who  has  declared  a  revenge  against  the 
north,  was  bound  to  enter  into  mischief  making  and 
was  coming  north.  The  whole  northern  country 
having  enjoyed  peace  so  long,  and  the  spiritual  power 
had  been  waning  and  passing  away  to  nothing,  this 
news  caused  a  great  alarm,  as  none  were  known  to  pos 
sess  the  power  the  men  had  who  were  then  dead  and 
gone,  Munus-kose  and  Mundo-ark-koke  had  both  died 
with  the  old  age,  and  none  were  known  to  have  filled 
their  places,  the  people  did  not  feel  secure.  However 
the  preparations  were  made  to  meet  any  emergency 
with  such  power  they  then  had.  It  was  not  long  when 
War-har-weh  made  his  appearance  at  the  extreme 
southern  part  of  the  north,  made  an  attack  on  the 
inhabitants,  killing  many,  took  and  carried  away  many 
prisoners.  When  this  was  done,  the  whole  north  was 
aroused  to  a  high  pitch,  runners  were  sent  out  to  carry 
and  spread  the  news,  and  a  general  assembly  of  the 
country  was  called  which  was  readily  responded  to  by 
the  whole  north,  and  a  war  was  declared  against 
Go-eh-suk,  and  to  subdue  War-har-weh.  In  about 
seven  moons,  a  large  fleet  of  canoes  were  seen  sailing 
on  the  coast  heading  for  Go-eh-suk.  The  point  of  land 
where  War-har-weh  had  located  his  headquarters  had 
been  so  minutely  given  by  the  old  people  from  that 
section,  the  northern  forces  knew  exactly  where  to  go 
and  when  to  make  the  attack. 


raft 


- 


122  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

All  the  arrangements  were  so  well  made  and  plans 
laid  that  when  the  place  was  reached  in  the  night  time, 
the  advanced  scouts  had  no  difficulty  in  arranging  for 
a  successful  attack.  The  scouts  discovered  War-har- 
weh's  headquarters  on  a  high  hill  overlooking  the  sea, 
as  well  as  the  bays,  which  could  be  reached  from  the 
main  land  by  a  sand  bar  or  peninsular  which  extended 
to  the  hill  where  War-har-weh  was  supposed  to  be  sleep 
ing.  This  sand  bar  was  covered  with  the  growth  of 
sand  grass,  therefore  it  was  called  "Nan-sus-kek," 
grassy  fore-ground.  The  location  of  War-har-weh's 
wigwam  had  been  so  clearly  described  by  the  old  people 
it  was  easily  found  and  attacked.  But  the  darkness  of 
the  night  was  in  War-har-weh's  favor,  and  he  was  able  to 
give  them  the  slip  and  got  away  unhurt  by  hiding  himself 
among  the  eel  grass  near  the  water  on  the  bay  side  of 
the  sand  bar  where  he  laid  till  near  morning,  when  he 
emerged  from  his  hiding  place  and  walked  out  on  the 
eel  grass  flats  and  swam  across  a  small  river  just  before 
the  break  of  day,  got  into  a  thick  forest,  leaving  his 
people  to  the  mercy  of  the  enemy.  When  the  northern 
men  found  that  the  inhabitants  were  not  so  many  as  had 
been  expected,  did  not  enter  into  slaughtering  the 
women  and  children,  but  took  a  good  care  in  killing  the 
men,  saving  only  such  prisoners  they  could  easily  carry 
away  with  their  own  people  who  had  been  brought  there 
captives  by  War-har-weh.  Many  prisoners  were  killed 
after  daylight  before  the  eyes  of  the  women  and 
children.  War-har-weh's  wife  was  among  them,  and 
when  asked  who  she  was,  bravely  said  that  she  was  the 
wife  of  War-har-weh,  and  also  pointed  out  her  only  son 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED  MAN.  123 

who  was  among  the  captives.  This  young  man's  life 
was  spared  and  he  was  securely  bound  and  was  carried 
north  with  the  other  prisoners.  Knowing  that  they 
had  secured  War-har-weh's  son,  and  that  he  would  go 
north  after  him  after  things  had  quieted,  the  army  did 
not  tarry  long  on  the  ground,  was  soon  embarked  in  the 
canoes  and  was  soon  heading  for  "Qua-nee-bek,"  Long 
Blade,  at  the  north  ;  and  when  the  mouth  of  Qua-nee-bek 
was  reached,  here  the  prisoners  were  landed  and  taken  to 
a  high  bluff  of  land,  and  a  large  force  was  placed  there 
to  guard  them,  because  it  was  thought  that  War-har- 
weh  would  not  make  much  delay  in  coming  after  his 
son.  Before  the  big  army  was  temporarily  disbanded, 
a  large  meeting  was  held,  and  in  this  meeting  an  agree 
ment  and  plan  was  made  to  the  effect,  that  when  War- 
har-weh  came,  no  matter  whether  he  be  for  peace  or 
war,  he  shall  be  beheaded  and  all  that  comes  with  him. 
As  had  been  predicted,  it  was  not  long  when  a  canoe 
was  seen  on  the  coast  coming  north,  containing  only 
three  persons.  The  number  being  so  small,  was  allowed 
to  approach  unmolested  which  soon  landed  where  many 
was  standing  to  receive  them.  Seeing  this  and  upon 
being  approached,  the  head  of  the  three  stepped  forth 
holding  up  the  pipe  of  peace,  signifying  what  they  had 
come  for,  were  soon  conducted  to  a  wigwam 
which  had  been  vacated  for  the  purpose,  and  into  this 
wigwam  they  were  allowed  to  enter,  and  a  strong  guard 
was  put  upon  it.  Here  War-har-weh  made  known 
his  mission.  The  answer  given  him  was,  that  in  seven 
suns  an  answer  will  be  given  him.  Runners  were 
immediately  sent  out,  calling  in  all  that  can  come 


124  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

within  the  time  specified.  And  this  call  brought  out 
about  all  the  North  to  witness  the  execution.  The 
number  that  came  was  so  great  that  the  land  was 
literally  covered  with  people  ;  And  as  there  being  no 
wigwam  large  enough  to  hold  this  vast  assemblage,  an 
open  spot  of  land  was  selected  where  the  council  was 
held.  When  meeting  had  been  called  to  order,  the  first 
move  War-har-weh  made  was  to  produce  the  pipe  of 
peace  which  he  handed  over  to  his  friend  who  was 
seated  next  to  him  and  commanded  him  to  rise  and  hold 
the  pipe  up  high,  while  War-hah-weh  turned  and  immediately 
began  to  unpack  his  pack,  and  after  this  was  done  he 
began  to  plead  and  asked  for  peace.  Showing  a  large 
amount  of  wampun  and  other  valuables  which  he  had 
brought  and  wished  to  give  as  a  ransom  for  his  son's  release. 
Immediately  after  War-har-weh  had  ended  his  talk,  "Nequ- 
tar-tar-wet" — The  Lone  Star,  who  was  then  the  greatest  war 
leader  of  the  north  stepped  in  front  and  told  War-har-weh 
that  his  doom  had  already  been  sealed,  and  it  was  his  duty 
to  tell  him  that  as  he  never  had  shown  peace  nor  mercy  to 
the  women  and  children,  his  and  his  friends  heads  shall  be 
taken  off  their  bodies.  And  Nequ-tar-tar-wet  here  gave  the 
signal  to  the  three  men  who  had  been  placed  close  in  the  rear 
of  the  doomed  men,  who,  upon  seeing  the  signal  immediately 
grasped  the  long  hair  of  each  of  the  men  whose  heads  are  to 
be  taken  off,  and  with  a  well  directed  aim  with  their  long  war 
knives,  two  heads  were  held  up  to  Nequ-tar-tar-wet,  but 
the  third  man  missed  his  stroke  and  the  southern  man 
managed  to  break  away  by  getting  on  his  feet  and  gaining  an 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OP  THE  BED  MAN.  125 

open  space  after  passing  through  the  vast  crowd,  ran 
for  dear  life.  But  unfortunately  for  the  poor  man,  a  flank 
guard  had  previously  been  placed  so  that  in  case  an  escape 
was  made,  none  of  those  escaped  could  reach  the  main  land. 
The  man  saw  this  and  turned  to  a  space  that  he  saw  laid 
open  for  him,  although  this  open  space  led  to  the  highest 
bluff  of  the  land,  a  precipice  of  rock,  yet,  to  this  he  ran  ;  some 
swift  footed  young  warriors  ran  in  pursuit,  but  the  man 
gained  the  bluff.  Seeing  he  could  run  no  further  nor  retreat 
back,  kept  on,  and  when  the  edge  of  the  precipice  was 
reached,  he  made  a  high  leap  off  the  precipice  saying  as  he 
leaped,  uAr-gur-muk,"  meaning  "over  to  the  other  land," 
but  the  poor  fellow  did  not  reach  there  but  was  dashed  to 
pieces  among  the  rocks  below. 

Thus  ended  all  War-har-weh's  mission.  When  quiet  had 
been  restored  and  war  assembly  was  about  to  be  dissolved, 
it  was  decreed  that  the  heads  of  the  two  warriors  be  pre 
served  and  shall  be  taken  through  the  northern  and  eastern 
countries,  from  place  to  place  by  seven  women.  This  exhibi 
tion  was  intended  to  show  what  will  be  the  fate  whoever 
undertakes  to  disturb  the  peace  of  the  north  as  War-har-weh 
had  done.  This  order  of  the  assembly  was  strictly  carried 
out,  these  heads  were  exhibited  from  place  to  place  for  seven 
years.  There  still  remained  four  prisoners  in  the  hands  of  the 
northern  people,  who  had  been  captured  and  brought  north 
by  the  army  that  subdued  War-har-weh ;  these  were  all 
young  men,  and  War-har-weh's  son  was  among  them.  They 
all  had  been  forced  to  witness  the  execution  of 
their  warriors.  These  young  men  had  not  been  cruelly 


126  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED   MAN. 

tortured  as  might  have  been  expected,  but  were  closely 
guarded  and  watched,  having  shown  no  desire  to  escape  were 
allowed  many  privileges,  and  the  treatment  extended  to  them 
was  as  good  as  can  be  expected  under  like  circumstances. 
Without  doubt,  these  young  men  must  have  laid  plans  for 
their  escape  while  receiving  so  good  a  treatment,  because  not 
many  years  had  elapsed  when  one  fine  morning  the  young  War- 
har-weh  was  missing,  which  led  to  an  investigation  concerning 
the  other  three,  and  the  result  of  the  investigation  revealed 
that  the  other  three  prisoners  were  missing,  and  two  nice 
canoes  and  a  good  outfit  of  paddles  could  not  be  found. 
These  two  canoes  were  never  seen  afterward.  This  escape 
was  considered  to  be  so  small  a  matter  no  pursuit  was  made, 
therefore  these  young  men  safely  reached  Go-eh-suk,  which 
they  found  deserted,  and  upon  going  further  south  they 
found  some  of  their  own  folks  among  those  that  were  living 
there. 

When  these  were  forced  to  flee  for  safety  from  the  clutches 
of  the  northern  army,  many  of  the  young  warriors  kept  on 
further  south  in  search  of  the  ones  who  had  gone  that  way, 
and  who  had  been  known  to  ascend  a  large  river,  which 
bore  its  direction  toward  the  north  land,  which  was  named, 
"Watch-we-took" — River  of  mountains. 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED  MAN.  127 


CHAPTER  VI. 


The  winding  up  the  war  with  the  May -Quays.— The  grand  council  estab 
lished—The  arrival  and  settlement  of  the  white  man. 


THESE  people  having  gone  so  far  away,  the  northern 
people  never  followed  them,  therefore  never  penetrated 
that  part  of  the  country  and  knew  very  little  about  it. 
This  much  however  was  known,  that  after  many  years 
these  scattered  people  came  together  and  located  them 
selves  on  the  west  shore  of  the  big  river  and  called 
themselves  the  "May-Quay,"  May-May  people,  and  after 
many  years  were  known  as  the  Mohawks. 

This  scattered  portion  of  the  red  people  being  all 
young  and  strong  they  naturally  had  the  inclination  of 
becoming  warlike,  but  being  afraid  of  the  northern 
power  did  not  venture  to  molest  that  country.  They 
learned  this  from  some  minor  raids  they  tried  to  carry 
out,  which  in  all  of  them,  met  with  ready-handed  squads 
to  repulse  them.  They  were  obliged  to  adopt  the  kid 
napping  game,  and  would  steal  persons  and  carry  them 
off  as  prisoners,  and  having  met  with  some  success  in 
this,  became  more  bold,  and  began  to  kill  more  freely. 
When  this  kind  of  work  begun,  the  whole  north  took 
it  into  its  hand  to  subdue  and  do  away  withtthe  whole 
thing.  When  this  was  undertaken,  the  work  was  so 
planned  and  executed  that  the  May-Quay's  hope  of 
mastery  was  forever  blasted  in  a  manner  as  will  be 
mentioned  later. 


128  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

When  War-har-weh's  son  and  the  other  prisoners 
made  their  escape  there  was  no  attempt  made  to  pursue 
them,  the  principal  reason  was  of  this,  that  just  at  this 
time  an  exciting  news  was  brought  from  the  extreme 
north  to  the  effect,  that  the  white  man's  big  canoe  had 
come  again,  and  had  landed  its  people  who  are  still 
remaining  on  the  land  on  the  north  shore  of  the  "Ma- 
quozz-bem-to-cook,  Lake  River,"  and  have  planted  some 
heavy  blocks  of  wood  in  the  form  of  a  cross.  These 
people  are  white  and  the  lower  part  of  the  faces  of  the 
elder  ones  are  covered  with  hair,  and  the  hair  is  in  differ 
ent  colors,  and  the  eyes  are  not  alike,  some  have  dark 
while  others  have  light  colored  eyes,  some  have  eyes  the 
color  of  the  blue  sky.  They  have  shown  nothing  only 
friendship,  they  take  the  red  man's  hands  in  their  own 
and  bow  their  heads  down  and  make  many  signs  in  the 
direction  of  the  stars ;  and  their  big  canoe  is  filled  with 
food  which  they  eat  and  also  give  some  to  those  that 
come  to  them  and  made  signs  of  friendship.  When 
this  news  spread,  the  people  took  it  so  quietly  and  talked 
about  it  in  such  a  way,  there  was  no  excitement,  but 
everybody  took  it  as  though  it  was  an  old  affair,  yet  it 
had  such  effect  upon  them,  that  it  was  evident  that  the 
general  desire  was,  that  the  habits  of  the  strange  people 
must  be  well  learned,  and  all  agree  to  wait  and  see 
what  kind  of  a  treatment  they  will  extend  to  the  red 
people.  If  the  treatment  they  have  already  extended 
be  continued,  it  was  thought  will  be  the  means  of 
bringing  happiness  to  both  races.  This  was  the  conclu 
sion  reached,  which  after  many  years  proved  to  be  so 
wise,  because  it  was  upon  this  conclusion  strictly  lived 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  129 

up  to,  that  the  red  man  of  the  north   never   had  any 
trouble  with  the  white  man. 

Although  the  white  man  has  given  his  hand  as  a 
brother,  yet,  the  distrust  on  the  part  of  the  red  man 
was  great,  which  had  been  led  to  it  by  the  action  and 
bad  conduct  of  the  May-Quays.  Anticipating  trouble 
from  all  quarters,  knowing  not  from  whence,  or  how  it 
will  come,  the  happiness  of  the  north,  as  might  be  ex 
pected  soon  became  almost  "The  thing  of  past."  Here, 
on  one  side  a  strange  people  have  begun  to  plant  them 
selves  almost  in  their  midst,  while  on  the  other,  their  own 
people  making  raids  upon  their  weakest  points ;  still 
the  attention  they  were  bound  to  give  to  this  strange 
white  man  never  for  a  moment  wavered,  because  the 
stranger's  action  toward  them  was  of  such  a  nature 
and  so  impressive,  no  hostilities  toward  him  was  talked, 
nor  even  thought  of. 

The  signs  of  brotherhood  has  been  manifested  by 
him  so  plainly  that  everyone  having  the  chance  of 
meeting  him,  greets  him  with  the  "Nitchieh," — brother. 
Because  all  his  actions  were  taken  as  such.  But  the 
most  striking  character  of  his  works  was  in  his  endeavors 
in  converting  the  people  to  become  believers  in  his  spirit 
ual  teachings  ;  being  yet  a  whole  believer  in  the  spiritual 
power,  the  red  man,  when  taught  thus,  readily  con 
ceived  the  idea  and  believed  in  such  teaching  and  was 
ready  to  wait  and  see  the  outcome  of  it. 

Meanwhile  the  works  of  those  terrible  May-Quay's 
had  become  so  unbearable  that  something  must  be 
done  to  quell  it,  even  if  they  had  to  be  wiped  out  of  the 
land  forever,  because  many  people  have  already  been 


130  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN. 

converted  and  were  not  only  believers,  but  followers  of 
the  white  man's  doctrine  and  it  had  made  such  a 
change  in  them  they  knew  enough  to  be  cautious  and 
slow  in  their  movements  in  this  direction.  Seven  years 
was  agreed  upon  to  make  a  general  aggressive  move. 
And  during  these  seven  years  of  council  a  well 
planned  campaign  had  been  perfected.  Although  the 
people  had  already  been  well  scattered  to  the  South, 
North,  East  and  West,  yet  by  careful  canvassing  it  was 
found  that  all  were  having  the  same  mind  ;  and  it  was 
also  found  among  those  that  emigrated  to  other  parts 
of  the  country,  had  received  the  doctrine  of  the  white 
man  and  all  wanted  peace.  To  make  a  permanent  affair 
of  it,  an  act  of  federation  was  adopted  by  all  the 
north,  embracing  the  north  of  "Ko-chi-koke," — a  great 
gum  river,  extending  to  the  extreme  east  of  "Mik- 
murk-keag," — the  youngest  land,  and  as  far  west  as 
"Odur-wur-keag," — father  land.  Seven  years  was 
found  a  sufficient  time  in  which  to  make  all  necessary 
arrangements  and  a  war  cry  was  to  be  heard  all  over  the 
land,  and  an  outbreak  of  the  May- Quays  was  anxiously 
looked  for  at  the  same  time.  Whether  through 
"IT  spy  or  otherwise,  they  must  have  known  what 
was  up,  because  they  did  not  venture  out  on  any 
raiding  expedition  for  at  least  another  seven 
years.  And  during  all  these  years,  they  were  closely 
watched  and  were  at  last  discovered  to  be  on 
the  move  with  a  large  force,  heading  for  Mik-mur-keag; 
and  the  route  selected  was  down  the  Ma-qozz-bem-to- 
cook.  They  had  scarcely  made  the  move  when  a  war 
signal  was  given  all  over  the  land  ;  Odur-wer,  came 
down  on  the  same  river  not  far  in  May-Quay's  rear  ; 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  131 

others  rushed  from  their  quarters  and  in  a  very  few 
days  all  of  the  northern  forces  met  at  the  extreme  east 
ern  part  of  Mik-mur-keag  ;  but  not  a  trace  of  May- 
Quays  had  been  discovered  by  the  parties  that  came 
from  all  directions,  yet  they  were,  u  hen  last  seen,  com 
ing  down  the  river  in  canoes;  Odur-wur,  who  also  came 
down  the  same  river  in  canoes  saw  nothing  of  them. 
After  the  army  had  got  together  the  leaders  of  it  met  in 
council  and  it  was  decided  to  hunt  them  up  and  to  wind 
up  the  war  with  them  if  possible.  A  careful  search  was 
being  made  on  both  sides  of  the  big  river  and  all  the 
small  branches  carefully  examined,  but  no  trace  of  them 
could  be  found.  A  sand  Island,  near  the  mouth  of 
"Tur-too-saqu," — ledge  door,  was  passed  several  times, 
but  being  a  baren  sand  Island  and  could  be  examined 
with  the  eye  from  the  distant  waters,  it  was  not 
expected  that  they  would  be  on  it,  in  fear  of  being  easily 
found,  therefore  the  army  passed  by  it  several  times, 
yet  the  May-quays  were  on  that  Island,  buried  in  the 
sand,  not  only  themselves  but  their  canoes  were  buried 
as  well  so  that  not  a  vestige  could  anyone  have  seen 
unless  he  was  stepping  on  them,  and  in  this  way  they 
escaped  detection.  And  when  the  search  was  being 
abandoned  in  that  part  of  the  river,  a  canoe  was  seen 
coming  down  containing  four  men,  who  were  allowed 
to  approach  and  were  found  to  be  friends,  and  had  come 
to  join  them  in  their  war.  These  folks  reported  that 
they  had  made  a  very  close  observations  of  all  parts  of 
the  country  and  had  discovered  nothing  of  the  enemy, 
a  change  of  tacties  was  then  adopted,  because  it  was 
then  supposed  that  the  enemy  was  on  the  sand  Island  ; 
so  a  stratagem  was  planned  and  put  into  operation  in 


132  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS  OP  THE  RED  MAN. 

this  manner;  that  the  same  canoe  that  came  down,  after 
taking  out  two  of  its  passengers  and  the  remaining  two 
to  go  along  toward  the  mouth  of  Tur-too-saqu,  on  a 
hunting  pretense.  They  are  to  be  looking  for  game 
from  place  to  place  until  the  mouth  of  the  river  reached, 
then  if  no  signs  of  the  enemy  being  discovered,  they 
are  to  strike  out[with  all  possible  haste  directly  for  the 
sand  Island  and  when  they  have  reached  the  latter 
place, *when^nearing  its  shore  to  sing  out  "Quai"  a  well 
known  salute  among  hunters  when  they  meet.  Being 
thus  saluted  they  will  naturally  feel  that  have  been 
discovered,  and  will  strive  hard  to  capture  or  kill 
their  discoverers  so  as  to  be  able  to  further  elude  the 
pursuing  party  if  there  was  one  on  their  track. 

As'a  lively  chase  was  expected  to  follow,  the  route 
of  retreat  laid  out  was  to  be  directly  back  to  the  mouth 
of  Tur-too-saqu,  and  if  closely  pursued  run  up  it,  until 
a  good  landing  place  is  reached,  and  if  still  pursued  run 
ashore,  leave  the  canoe  and  run  up  the  moutain,  take  a 
circuitous^  route  to  the  shore  of  the  big  river  where 
there  will  be  a  small  squad  detailed  to  pick  them  up ; 
and  if  not  successful  in  the  first  attempt  in  drawing  out 
the  enemy,  make  another  effort  after  resting  half  day. 
This  second  attempt  will  surely  draw  them  out,  because 
they  then  will  be  fully  convinced  that  they  have  been 
discovered;  and  if  the  second  attempt  drew  out  nothing, 
to  come  to  the  main  force  when  some  other  plan  be  tried. 
The  second  attempt,  however,  was  not  needed,  because 
when  these  hunters  got  within  a  hailing  distance  of  the 
island,  saw  a  man  on  the  move  from  one  place  to 
another,  and  to  this  man  the  hunters  shouted  "Quai," 


LIFE   AND  TRADITIONS  OF  THE  BED  MAN.  133 

who  responded  with  a  signal  yell  which  brought  the 
whole  army  out  of  the  sand  where  it  had  been  laying  hid 
for  several  days.  Without  making  further  examination, 
the  hunters  turned  the  bow  of  their  canoe  shoreward 
and  pulled  for  Tur-too-saqu,  while  the  enemy  clambered, 
and  lifted  their  canoes  out  of  the  sand  mounds,  launched 
and  filled  them  with  warriors  and  gave  a  chase.  Those 
that  were  launched  on  the  side  of  the  island  next  to 
the  fugitives  got  on  the  chase  so  much  sooner,  they  got 
far  in  advance  before  the  rest  of  the  force  got  under 
way  on  the  chase;  meanwhile  the  northern  army  which 
had  been  silently  drifting  down  by  the  island  during 
the  previous  night,  and  had  disembarked  and  had  hidden 
their  canoes  in  the  bushes,  rushed  out  with  them  and 
and  was  soon  on  the  scene  of  this  grand  chase.  The 
enemy  seeing  this  and  perceiving  the  magnitude  of  its 
army,  immediately  began  to  show  signs  of  bewilder 
ment,  and  in  their  perplexity  attempted  to  recall,  and 
even  pulled  to  head  off  the  rest  of  their  force  from 
further  pursuit ;  but  that  part  of  the  force  got  so  far 
in  advance,  knew  nothing  of  what  was  taking  place 
behind  them  kept  on  chasing  the  hunters.  About  one- 
third  of  the  May-Quay's  army  was  in  this  hot  pursuit 
while  the  balance  of  it  whirled  and  began  to  pull  back 
for  the  sand  Island.  But  this  was  useless,  as  the 
northerners  had  anticipated  this,  and  had  laid  plans  to 
avert  it,  and  without  much  effort  headed  off  the  May- 
Quay  army  which  they  soon  surrounded  and  disarmed 
mid  the  waters  of  the  Great  Lake  river.  Both  armies 
then  rested  and  looked  on  to  see  the  two  squads  who 
are  both  on  a  chase.  The  May-Quay's  did  not  know 


134  LIFE   AND  TRADITIONS   OP  THE   RED  M4N. 

that  they  were  being  pursued  until  just  before  reaching 
the  mouth  of  Tur-too-saqu,  then  only  when  their  pur 
suers  got  so  near  upon  them  that  they  heard  the  racket 
made  by  them,    when  the  leader  of  the    May-Quays 
looked  around  and  saw  that  they  were  being  closely 
pursued  by  the  enemy,  and  who  had  already  got  the 
space  between  him   and  his  friends,  undertook  to  turn 
and  slip  by  his  pursuer  and  get  back  to  the  main  force  ; 
but  the  quick- eyed  northerner  would    not   allow  this 
done  when  he  could  so  easily  prevent  it  by  making  a 
flank   move   which    he    did,  which    caused   the    May- 
Quays  to  turn  again  and  continue  on  towards  Tur-too- 
saqu  which  they  soon  reached,  and  ran   along  near  the 
shore,  and  when  an  opportunity  offered,  jumped  out  of 
their  canoes,  ran   up  the  mountain  while  their  pursuers 
were  close  at  their  heels.     In  this  way  the  two  squads 
Hew   up  the  mountain,  and  when  May-Quay  saw  the 
hopelessness  of  making  further  effort  to  escape,  made 
a  stand  from  which  to  give  a  battle.     This  battle  was  a 
fierce  one  which  lasted  all  the  rest  of  the  day.     And 
when  night  was  fast  approaching  with  no  apparent  gain 
on  either  side,  the  leaders  on   both  sides   being  great 
warriors  got  very   much  excited  over  the  day's  work, 
both  got  exasperated  over  its  outlook,  both  at  the  same 
moment  determined  to  bring  the  matters  to  a  close  by 
making  one  great  and  the  last  effort,  decided  to  use  the 
spiritual  power  that  was  in  them,  which  both  had  been 
hesitating   to  bring   to    bear    upon    their    fellowmen ; 
knowing  that  when  they  use   it  in   that    way,  it   will 
depart  from  them  forever,  therefore  hesitated  to  resort 
to  such  work.     But  things  had  got  so  far  that  discretion 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN.  135 

was  no  longer  a  part  of  valour,  both  at  the  same 
moment,  unbeknown  to  each,  stepped  in  front,  gave 
the  earth  a  violent  stamp  with  the  right  foot,  at  the 
same  time  throwing  his  war  weapons  savagely  on  the 
earth.  This  was.  done  to  start  an  earthquake,  and  it 
so  happened  in  this  case  that  the  leaders  of  both  of 
these  forces  possessed  the  same  power,  and  by  apply 
ing  it  at  the  same  moment  caused  a  severe  earthquake 
to  follow,  and  so  severe  was  it,  it  not  only  shook  things, 
but  the  earth  itself  parted  and  swallowed  up  both 
forces  while  they  were  thus  engaged  in  a  deadly  conflict ; 
leaving  only  the  two  leaders  on  both  sides  standing,  and 
listening  to  the  screeches  made  by  the  men  they  had 
been  leading ;  screeches  issuing  from  under  the  earth 
where  these  poor  men  are  forever  shut  up.  Seeing 
what  they  had  done,  and  knowing  that  by  using  and 
abusing  the  spiritual  power  in  the  manner  they  did,  was 
a  sufficient  cause  for  them  to  lose  the  art,  so  they  both 
advanced  to  each  other,  shook  hands,  and  made  peace 
over  the  chasm.  And  while  on  their  way  back  to  their 
people,  made  the  compromise  that  they  shall  both  abide 
by  the  results  of  the  works  of  their  main  forces  to 
which  they  belonged.  The  main  forces  were  not  idle 
while  all  this  was  going  on  up  in  the  mountains. 
Everything  had  been  all  settled  on  the  water  where  the 
May-Quays  were  held  prisoners,  and  the  two  forces 
were  waiting  to  get  the  news  from  their  respective 
squads  and  hear  the  results.  When  night  was  nearing, 
the  old  warriors  said  that  there  must  be  a  hard  battle 
raging  between  the  two  squads  somewhere  up  the  Tur- 
too-saqu.  At  this,  the  May-Quays  showed  signs  of 


136  LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED  MAN. 

uneasiness,  while  the  northerners  had  so  much  confi 
dence  in  their  men  waited  with  all  possible  quietude  and 
calmness.     This  drifting  around  in  the  river  was  kept 
up  all  night,  and  when  the  morning  came,  when  the  sun 
was  just  rising,  a  canoe  was  seen  coming  directly  toward 
the  armies,  and  when  the  canoe  arrived  it  was  found  to 
contain  the  two  leaders  of  the  squads  who  had  been  chas 
ing  one  another  for  the  last  day  and  night.     It  did  not 
take  long  for  the  returned  leaders  to  relate  and  make 
known    what  had   been   taking   place    up   among   the 
mountains   and   what   had   become    of    their    friends. 
When   the   May-Quays   knew   this   it    agitated    their 
spirit   very    much   and   finally   asked    to   be   allowed 
to     withdraw     from     where     they     were    then    kept 
to     consult   among     themselves    so     that   they    may 
come    to*  a     final   conclusion    what    action    to     take 
to  settle  their  situation,  and  no  doubt  but  that  they  may 
enter  into  what  may  be  expected  of  them  in  the  future. 
A  short  consultation  was  allowed  them,  and  they  were 
allowed   to  withdraw    from   their  captors,   who    took 
such  a  precaution  that  they  took  all  the  paddles  from 
their  captives  leaving  them  floating  about  without  them, 
and  were  only  allowed  to  keep  together  by  holding  their 
canoes  while  the  consultation  was  being  held.  The  north 
erners  having  withdrawn  to  a  short  distance  from  them 
also  held  a  consultation  to  see  what  to  do  with  the 
prisoners.     It  did  not  take  long  for  them  to  decide  that 
should   the  prisoners  ask   for   anything  other   than  a 
permanent  peace,  all  the  best  warriors  shall  be  slain 
leaving  only  a  few  to  escape  death  who  shall  receive  a 
permanent  mark  upon  their  person,  such  as  cutting  off 


LIFE   AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN.  137 

the  ears,  nose,  or  an  eye  plucked  oat,  after  which  be 
allowed  to  go  their  way  in  peace.  While  this  council 
was  holding,  the  May-Quay  gave  the  signal  that  their 
conference  had  ended,  and  the  northerners  immediately 
repaired  to  join  them.  Upon  getting  together,  the 
May-Quays  made  a  vow  with  great  solemness,  that  if 
allowed,  they  would  live  in  peace  with  all  the  people  in 
all  times  to  come,  and  were  ready  then  to  accede  to  any 
and  all  things  required  of  them.  The  northerners, 
though  conquerors,  yet  upon  hearing  such  declaration 
gave  them  great  joy,  and  another  council  was  immedi 
ately  held,  and  in  this,  the  prayer  of  the  prisoners 
was  granted.  And  in  order  to  satisfy  all  who  had  been 
troubled  more  or  less  with  the  past  wars,  a  place  was 
selected  where  a  grand  council  fire  was  to  be  located 
and  established,  where  all  the  heads  of  clans  which  had 
previously  been  changed  into  tribes,  shall  go  once 
in  seven  years  to  renew  the  council  fire  and  talk  over 
matters  for  the  general  good.  And  it  was  here  decreed 
that  the  prisoners  shall  establish  their  quarters  on  the 
place  designated,  there  to  take  care  of  the  council  fire, 
and  whenever  a  delegation  comes  to  the  grand  council 
fire  to  renew  it,  they  shall  furnish  food  for  all  that  come 
and  shall  furnish  shelter  and  give  all  necessary  comfort 
during  the  stay  of  the  delegation  without  pay.  This 
was  the  proposition  submitted  to  May-Quays  which 
they  readily  accepted,  and  a  treaty  of  this  nature 
was  made,  and  to  make  it  lasting,  a  large  collection  of 
wampum  was  made  from  all  parts  of  the  country  which 
was  afterwards  woven  into  a  wampum  band  two  hands 
wide  and  twenty-one  hands  long,  and  along  in  the 


138  LIFE     AND    TRADITIONS  OF  THE   RED   MAN. 

middle  part  many  different  characters  were  woven  in, 
representing  what  the  band  was  made  for  and  who  are 
concerned  in  it.  This  band  was  the  grand  council  fire 
which  was  left  in  the  care  of  the  May-Quays  who 
were  very  faithful  to  their  duty  until  very  recently  when 
they  began  to  show  signs  of  change  in  their  demenour 
which  was  soon  discovered,  and  the  visits  to  the  grand 
council  fire  was  after  a  while  stopped.  This  discontinu 
ance  was  brought  about  by  the  action  of  Odur-wur 
which  was  soon  followed  by  all  the  other  tribes. 

The  spot  selected  where  the  grand  council  fire  was  to 
be  established  was  at  the  head  of  the  first  big  rapids  of 
the  great  lake  river,  and  the  name  given  to  it 
was  "K'chi-skoo-tek,"  grand  council  fire.  As  has  been 
stated  before,  that  all  the  tribes  visit  this  council  fire 
every  seven  years,  and  during  the  council  days  all  kinds 
of  sports  were  enjoyed  by  the  young  class. 

At  first  the  May-Quays  seemed  pleased  to  have  the 
people  come,  and  took  much  pride  in  being  able  to 
entertain  decently  all  that  came,  and  always  seemed 
delighted  in  serving  as  the  keeper,  but  after  a  long 
while  wanted  to  be  the  commander,  wanted  to  be 
boss,  this  the  people  could  not  tolerate,  and  quit  going 
there.  The  last  visit  made  from  the  east  was  only 
fifty-three  years  ago,  and  some  of  the  young  men  that 
went  with  the  old  men  on  that  last  visit  are  still  living. 
One  feature  of  the  federation  that  can  be  called  pleasant, 
is  that  the  people  divided  themselves  into  three  classes, 
the  father,  eldest  son  and  the  j'oungest  son.  "Odur- 
wur"  was  the  father,  "Wur-bar-Nar-ki, — dawn  lander," 
the  eldest  son,  and  "Mik-Mur, — the  last  born"  was  the 


LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OP  THE  RED  MAN.  139 

youngest  son.  And  after  the  division  was  made 
the  oldest  Mik-mur  present,  was  undressed  and  put 
into  "T'ki-nur-gann", — cradle,  where  he  was  kept  tied 
and  fed  all  day  like  the  little  babe,  and  every  time  the 
delegation  met  at  the  grand  council  fire  this  perform 
ance  was  repeated,  which  shows  that  the  Mik-mur  was 
once  selected  as  the  youngest  of  all,  he  must  always  be 
treated  like  a  little  baby.  And  again,  what  made 
the  other  part  of  this  treaty  more  harmonizing  and 
solemn,  and  has  carried  its  impression  into  the  minds 
of  all  the  generations  that  followed  was,  that  after  the 
May-Quays  made  their  final  surrender  to  the  northern 
ers,  the  two  young  warriors  who  escaped  the  earth 
quake  were  made  to  lead  both  of  the  armies  to  the 
spot  where  the  two  squads  had  been  sunk,  and  upon 
reaching  the  place  which  had  been  the  battle  ground,  all 
was  found  in  much  confusion,  nothing  but  the  signs  of  the 
late  eruption  of  the  earth  could  be  seen.  But  the 
screeches  of  the  poor  creatures  that  were  shut  up  under 
the  earth  could  be  plainly  heard.  So  plainly  were  they, 
that  the  words  they  uttered  could  be  understood  by  those 
that  listened.  Their  cry  is  for  peace,  and  nothing  but 
peace.  These  screeches  were  so  pitiful  and  susceptible 
they  caused  much  feeling  among  all  that  heard  them,  the 
strongest  and  the  hardest  heart  could  resist  no  longer, 
but  every  heart  melted  and  joined  in  the  agreement  that 
this  spot  shall  always  be  held  sacred  in  the  hearts  of  all 
the  people,  and  that  the  peace  made  over  its  chasm  shall 
stand  forever,  and  the  people  shall  visit  the  sacred  spot 
at  least  once  in  seven  years.  This  agreement  was 
well  observed  and  kept  up  by  all  the  people  and  the 


140  LIFE  AND  TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

spot  was  visited  quite  frequently  for  many  times  seventy 
years,  and  every  time  the  ground  being  visited  the 
screeches  of  these  poor  creatures  who  are  shut  up  there 
can  be  heard  very  plain. 

This  ended  all  the  wars  among  the  red  people. 
Next  follows  the  coming  of  the  white  man,  as  has  been 
stated,  the  strange  people  had  already  planted  blocks 
of  wood  in  the  form  of  a  cross,  and  also  how  kind  and 
brotherly  he  was,  had  such  a  weight  in  the  heart  of  the 
red  man  the  people  waited  with  much  interest  to  see 
him  come  again.  The  conquest  of  the  northerners  over 
the  May-Quays  was  so  pleasing  to  all  the  people  they 
were  ready  to  accept  anything  offered  them  by  almost 
anyone  in  the  form  of  peace,  so  when  the  white  man 
came  and  lived  among  them  they  were  ready  to  receive 
and  believe  his  doctorine.  The  reason  of  this  ready 
belief  was  because  the  teaching  was  similar  to  the  one 
the  spiritual  men  of  the  people  had  been  teaching,  so 
when  the  white  man's  missionaries  came  they  had  an 
easy  task  in  converting  to  its  folds  many  and  all  that 
could  be  reached. 

At  about  this  period  another  white  man  came  in  his 
big  canoe  and  landed  on  the  shore  of  the  eastern  coast 
almost  in  the  midst  of  the  northern  country,  on  a  high 
island  very  near  the  spot  where  Klose-kur-beh  and  the 
dog  killed  the  first  moose.  Here  the  white  man  planted 
his  cross,  and  here  he  lingered  until  after  many  other 
white  men  came.  Here  the  red  man  received  the 
religion  of  the  white  man.  The  red  man  was  now 
ready  to  be  converted  and  resigned  himself  to  wait  for 
the  future  fate  that  may  come. 


LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED   MAN.  141 


CONCLUSION. 

NOT  wishing  to  indulge  too  freely  in  the  habit  of 
negligence  thereby  leaving  my  readers  in  the  dark  on 
the  very  matters  that  the  people  wish,  or  ought  to 
know,  I  deem  it  expedient,  before  coming  to  the  final 
close  with  this  work,  to  give  the  fullest  account  pos 
sible,  of  the  daily  life  and  convenience  of  these  people 
who  are  now  on  the  descending  slide  scale  to  a  point 
not  yet  settled.  First,  I  call  the  attention  of  the 
reader  to  the  time  when  the  red  man  looked  upon,  or 
was  wholly  dependent  on  the  Great  Spirit  in  furnishing 
him  so  to  meet  all  his  daily  needs.  But  it  was  not 
long  before  he  discovered  that  something  must  be  done 
by  man,  especially  in  the  matter  of  keeping  the  fire 
going,  so  that  he  could  have  it  by  him  and  set  up  a 
blaze  when  he  wished,  because  there  had  been  many 
instances  where  people  were  obliged  to  go  without  it 
for  a  long  time.  True,  the  Great  Spirit  would  not  let 
them  suffer,  and  the  idea  of  the  people  being  in  the 
same  way,  would  diligently  seek  deliverance,  and  often 
scouring  the  country  to  find  a  small  speck  of  fire  from 
which  they  could  gather  their  supply.  There  never 
was  a  time  that  they  were  obliged  to  return  empty 
handed,  but  always  found  that  being  patient  in  the 
continuous  hunt  would  find  a  tree  that  had  been  struck 
by  lightning  that  still  retained  the  fire  that  had  been 
brought  upon  it.  But  the  difficulty  was  how  to  keep 


142  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS  OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

it  burning  while  it  was  being  transported  from 
one  place  to  another,  especially  in  the  case  where  the 
places  are  far  apart.  Experiment  solved  that  the  outer 
bark  of  the  "Kunks-koosi," — cedar  tree,  after  having 
been  rubbed  fine  would  take  fire  readily  and  keep 
burning  until  it  was  all  consumed ;  but  on  account  of 
its  heavy  smoke  it  would  have  to  be  carried  in  the  hand 
uncovered ;  yet,  no  other  method  was  found  that  would 
answer  any  better  until  after  many  years  had  elapsed 
when  it  was  discovered  that  some  parts  of  the  green 
hard  wood  tree  produced  a  dry,  rotten  wood  now  called 
spunk,  which  substance  would  burn  very  slowly  and 
never  go  out  until  every  speck  of  it  had  been  consumed. 
It  burnt  so  slow  that  a  very  small  piece  lasted  half  a 
day  and  emitted  scarcely  any  smoke,  so  that  it  could 
be  carried  in  a  pouch  made  for  the  purpose.  Then 
came  the  question  how  to  prepare  it  so  it  will  not  burn 
the  pouch.  Clam  shells  were  found  just  what  was 
needed  after  having  been  lined  with  the  blue  clay  and 
a  small  aperture  having  been  left  open  between  the  two 
shells  through  which,  what  smoke  there  was  might 
escape ;  these  shells  were  put  together  and  tied 
tightly  and  put  into  the  pouch  made  of  a  whole  skin  of 
the  "Mo-nim-queh-so," — woodchuck,  which  can  be 
carried  on  one's  belt  outside  of  all  the  garments.  No 
part  of  the  skin  was  sewed,  having  been  skinned  whole, 
only  one  hole  cut  lengthwise  from  the  base  of  the  skull 
down  on  the  back  long  enough  to  admit  the  hand.  In 
preparing  the  skin  the  skull  after  having  ths  flesh  well 
scraped  off  and  the  bone  dried,  turned  back  into  its 
place,  is  then  ready  to  be  hung  on  the  belt  where  it 
will  not  slip  out. 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  143 

The  tree  that  produces  the  best  "Chi-quoqu-soqu," — 
spunk,  is  the  4tWee-quesk," — yellow  birch,  and  the 
shells  used  were  not  of  the  common  "Aiss," — clam, 
but  it  was  the  "Chim-quor-hur,"  which  was  of  the  thick 
and  round  species  commonly  know  as  the  quahog. 
Being  lined  with  the  "Mur-sar-loon-esqu," — blue  clay, 
kept  the  heat  in  the  shells  sufficiently,  and  will  not 
burn  things  so  that  the  hunter  and  others  were  able  to 
carry  fire  with  them  all  the  time. 

After  many  years  it  was  found  necessary  that  some 
thing  else  must  be  found  so  that  in  case  of  all  the  fires 
be  out  that  a  fire  might  be  brought  when  it  was  wanted 
without  hunting  for  it.  After  much  careful  study,  one 
young  genius  discovered  that  by  having  a  speed  wheel 
made  from  the  inner  bark  of  the  yellow  birch  in  three  or 
four  thicknesses,  fastened  together  so  that  it  will  have 
some  weight,  and  a  small  softwood  spindle  two  or  three 
hands  long,  put  through  this  wheel  so  that  when  the 
wheel  whirls  it  would  turn  the  spindle.  The  spindle 
must  be  longer  from  the  wheel  up  than  below  it.  To. 
the  top  end  of  this  spindle  some  fine  strips  of  the  skin 
of  the  "Na-hur-mo," — eel,  are  fastened,  allowing  the 
strips  to  be  in  sufficient  lengths  so  that  when  the  wheel 
turns  it  carries  the  spindle  with  it  and  the  strings  would 
wind  around  the  spindle,  the  other  end  of  the  strings 
being  tied  to  another  stick  which  is  placed  in  a 
horizontal  position  with  one  of  these  strings  on  each 
end,  and  the  spindle  being  in  upright  position  so  when 
the  wheel  is  in  motion  it  winds  up  the  strings  and  the 
horizontal  stick.  When  the  operator  finds  the  stick  is 
well  up  to  the  top  of  the  spindle,  presses  the  stick 


144  LIFE  AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE  RED  MAN. 

down,  it  stops  the  whirl  of  the  wheel  and  soon  begins 
to  revolve  the  other  way,  this  repeated  lively  a  blaze  is 
brought  at  the  foot  of  the  spindle,  a  spunk  is  applied 
and  a  fire  is  had.  This  horizontal  stick  does  not  only 
act  to  turn  the  wheel  but  it  also  helps  to  hold  up  the 
whole  machine.  The  foot  part  of  the  spindle  where 
the  fire  is  expected  to  come  must  be  very  dry,  and  the 
thing  that  turns  on  must  be  equally  so. 

The  pouch  in  which  the  fire  is  carried  was  called 
"Pitson-ungun."  To  make  a  vessel  to  boil  water  was 
an  easy  thing  to  invent.  It  was  simply  to  turn  up  the 
edges  of  the  "Mus-queh," — birch  bark,  so  it  will  form 
a  hollow  part,  and  a  small  stick  is  bent  and  fastened 
around  the  top  to  hold  the  edges  together.  It  is  then 
ready  to  be  filled  with  the  "Neppi," — water,  and  put 
on  the  "Skoo-teh," — fire.  This  fire  must  be  composed 
chiefly  of  hot  coals,  because  if  a  blaze  be  allowed  to  run 
up  to  the  top  of  the  kettle  it  would  soon  burn  off  the 
fastenings. 

"Sur-lur-waia," — salt,  was  never  used.  "Sunk-kur- 
dee," — needle,  was  a  piece  of  bone  found  in  certain 
parts  of  "Par-nar-kusso," — sable.  The  little  bone  has 
an  eye  like  the  needle  of  to-day,  and  after  sharpening 
the  other  end  the  needle  is  ready  for  use.  But  in  sew 
ing,  the  holes  are  first  made  with  the  "Magoos," — awl, 
made  from  the  tail  of  "So-paqui-tol-peh," — sea  turtle, 
which  is  of  the  horseshoe  species.  Dried  common 
thorns, — "Kur-weesiark,"  were  used  as  common  pins. 
"Emquann," — spoon,  and  "Quartsis," — drinking  cup, 
were  both  made  of  birch  bark.  In  some  instances 
the  spoon  is  made  of  "Arparsi," — wood.  It  is  then 


LIFE   AND   TRADITIONS   OF  THE   RKD   MAN.  145 

called  "Arpars-emquen."  "Wur-bur-bee,'" — wampum, 
is  made  from  the  different  colored  sea  shells  which  are 
DOW  extinct.  The  parts  of  the  shell  got  out  fit  for  use 
are  rubbed  on  some  gritty  stone  to  shape  them.  Then 
the  awl  is  used  to  make  the  holes.  The  making  of  the 
holes  was  the  slowest  part  of  the  work,  therefore  when 
it  was  made  it  was  considered  valuable.  It  was  never 
intended  to  be  used  as  money.  True  there  were  many 
instances  where  it  was  exchanged  for  some  other  things, 
yet  the  principal  object  was  that  it  only  be  used  as  the 
pledge  of  honor ;  say  for  instance,  that  whenever  a 
person  or  persons  wished  their  words  to  be  taken  hon 
orably  and  give  wampum  with  their  words,  will  be 
sufficient  to  settle  the  thing  desired.  Matches  for 
marriages  were  made  by  the  old  people  and  here  the 
wampum  is  used  as  the  pledge  of  honor  on  the  man's 
part.  Marriages  are  made  by  the  young  couple  making 
a  solemn  vow  and  seven  bows  in  silence  toward  the  sun 
when  it  was  highest  on  that  day  in  presence  of  the  old 
folks  that  made  the  match,  who  pronounced  them 
"Nis-we  Chik,"— husband  and  wife,  after  which  the 
man  follows  his  new  bride  to  her  folks  where  they  are 
to  stay  two  years  at  least. 

Some  names  of  the  different  places  which  have  been 
mentioned  in  this  work  are  found  to  have  been  cor 
rupted  by  the  white  man  in  trying  to  speak  the  original 
words  as  were  given  by  the  red  man.  We  find  that 
the  word  "Goeh-suk," — at  the  pines,  has  been  changed 
to  Cohasset,  and  then  the  word  "Nan-sus-keg," — 
grassy  foreground,  has  been  changed  to  Nantasket,  also 
the  word  "Quen-ne-bek," — long  blade,  to  Kennebec. 


146  LIKE    AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE    RED   WAN. 

And  the  word  "Ar-gur-muk," — over  to  the  other  land, 
has  been  changed  to  Hock  Mock.  The  last  mentioned 
place  was  where  War-har-weh  and  his  friend  were 
beheaded,  which  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Kennebec  river. 
The  name  of  "Mar-dar-mes-kun-teag," — young  shad 
pool  has  also  been  changed  to  Damariscotta.  The 
country  where  so  many  oak  acorns  were  harvested  and 
where  the  oyster  shell  mounds  can  now  be  seen.  The 
acorns  are  called  "Ar-nas-com-nal," — oak  tree,  "Ar- 
nas-com-messi,"  and  oysters,  "Mardes-sus-suk." 

Reading  and  writing  were  never  taught,  the  people 
had  no  notion  of  getting  in  that  way  until  after  they 
had  divided  themselves  into  clans.  In  forming  and 
organizing  the  clans,  some  noted  man  is  set  up  as  the  head 
of  the  clan,  and  the  lineage  ,of  him  is  traced  down  to 
all  the  descendants  who  are  claimed  as  the  members  of 
the  clan. 

Some  took  so  much  pride  in  their  clans  that  they 
began  to  draw  lines  of  distinction  and  adopted  some 
animal,  fish  or  fowl  as  the  symbol  of  their  class.  This 
new  idea  set  them  up  to  writing  or  making  marks,  so 
that  they  could  be  understood  by  those  who  see  them. 
Whenever  a  person  enters  into  some  new  country,  and 
wishes  others  to  know  that  he  had  been  there,  makes  a 
mark  on  the  side  of  a  tree  where  the  bark  had  been 
knocked  off,  here  the  emblem  of  the  clan  is  prominently 
pictured  out. 

Picture  of  a  wigwam  represents  the  home  of  the 
family  ;  picture  of  a  person  facing  from  it  means  going 
from  home ;  facing  to  it  represents  going  home ; 
picture  of  the  Sun  means  day;  the  Moon,  Month. 


LIFK   AND   TRADITIONS   OF   THE   RED   MAN.  147 

When  a  person  writes  the  number  of  days  of  his 
absence,  marks  out  the  sun,  and  under  it  puts  as  many 
notches  as  there  are  days  of  his  absence,  and  if  it  be 
months,  uses  the  moon  instead  but  exactly  in  the  same 
manner.  We  will  now  mention  one  of  each  of  the 
animals,  fish  and  fowl  that  were  adopted  as  the  symbols 
for  some  clans.  "Ar-wa-soose," — bear,  "Ar-na-tar- 
so," — humming  bird,  and  the  fish  sturgeon,  "Kar- 
par-seh." 

Besides  the  medicine  prepared  by  the  old  women  to 
heal  the  sick,  there  was  found  after  many  years,  or 
just  previous  to  the  coming  of  the  white  man,  a 
natural  medicinal  water  in  the  vicinity  of  "Kars- 
koke," — at  the  crane,  which  was  found  to  contain  very 
powerful  healing  powers,  the  effects  which  was  very 
much  the  same  as  the  medicine  prepared  by  the  healers, 
therefore  it  was  considered  very  valuable,  and  the  spot 
was  visited  by  all  the  people  from  all  parts  of  the 
country,  and  they  continued  their  visits  until  after  the 
white  man  came.  The  people  did  not  wish  to  quit,  nor 
go  without  enjoying  the  great  benefit  of  this  medicine 
water,  and  kept  going  there  until  the  white  man  took 
possession  of  it.  Since  that  time  we  have  been 
informed  that  it  has  gone  into  the  hands  of  an  indi 
vidual,  a  white  man,  of  the  town  of  Deering,  Maine. 
According  to  the  old  traditional  story  tellers,  this  water 
boils  out  of  the  earth  in  a  country  of  rocks  a  short 
walk  from  the  shore  of  Kars-koke  in  the  direction  of 
the  setting  sun.  This  great  medicine  water  was  called 
"K'chit-ka-bi." 

xm  END. 

.    •.,.-.,,... 


X 


m 

~^M 

1  A     T\  A  XT     TTOT? 

1? 


RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED    $& 


*"vv>pr 


+?***$ •t^^jc^^  >&$*/*£  x.?¥  vl'-f  Si^rwt  >^^/V/K5X/r?^«7rt?tf5-  >&$+£& K*fc 

ssSsal?s»SS98§ais«^lsS^a?lw^M« 


YD   ™c,~ 

I  h<     xi  i1^  I 


Jk.  ii .  \7/t>  5--;rA  5W  OrO?*  ^^L^^.  ^»  T7  --''  -  -^rfCVvrt  ^>G 


^^^^^^^^^^f^^-^^^ 


